Container Refrigeration

OPERATION AND SERVICE

For
69NT40-561-200 to 299
Container Refrigeration Units

T−362
 OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL
CONTAINER REFRIGERATION UNIT

Model
69NT40−561−200 to 299

©Carrier Corporation, 2013  Printed in U. S. A. May 2013

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety−1
FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety−1
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety−1
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety−1
SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety−1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.1 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.2 Temperature Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.3 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.4 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.5 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.6 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.7 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.3.8 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.4.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.4.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.4.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.4.4 Interrogator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.4.5 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
1.4.6 Quest − CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.8 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.9 Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.10 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.11 Thermometer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.12 Water Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.13 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.14 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.15 230 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.16 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.17 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.18 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.19 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.20 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.21 Condenser Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.22 Emergency Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
1.4.23 eAutoFresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2

i T-362
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
2.1.1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
2.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
2.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−2
2.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−3
2.1.5 Air−Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−4
2.1.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−5
2.1.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−5
2.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−6
2.3 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−7
2.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−8
2.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−9
2.5.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−9
2.5.2 Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−9
2.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−9
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1
3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1
3.1.1 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−2
3.1.2 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−2
3.1.3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
3.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
3.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
3.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.1 Start up - Compressor Phase Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.2 Start up - Compressor Bump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.4 Perishable Pulldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.5 Perishable Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.6 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.7 Perishable Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−4
3.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−5
3.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−6
3.3.10 Perishable Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−6
3.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−6
3.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.3.15 Frozen Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
3.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8

T-362 ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

3.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
3.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
3.3.20 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−9
3.3.21 Automatic Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−9
3.3.22 Defrost Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−9
3.3.23 Defrost Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−10
3.3.24 Defrost Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−10
3.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.4.2 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.4.3 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.4.4 Compressor High Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.4.5 Compressor Low Pressure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.4.6 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.4.7 Condenser Fan Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−11
3.5 QUEST − CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−12
3.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−12
3.7 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−12
3.8 DataCORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−13
3.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−13
3.8.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−13
3.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−14
3.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−14
3.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−14
3.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
3.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
3.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
3.8.9 Pre-trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
3.8.10 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
3.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−17
3.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−17
3.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−18
3.8.14 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−18
3.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−19
3.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−20
3.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−29
3.12 CONTROLLER PRE−TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−37
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1
4.1 INSPECTION (Before Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1
4.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1
4.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1
4.2.2 Connection To 190/230 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1

iii T-362
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page
4.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1
4.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−2
4.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−2
4.3.3 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.4 eAutoFresh OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.4.2 eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3
4.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−4
4.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.6.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.6.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.7 START−UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.7.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.7.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.8 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
4.9 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−6
4.10 EMERGENCY BYPASS OPERATION (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
5.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
5.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
5.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−2
5.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−2
5.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−2
5.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−2
5.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3
5.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−4
5.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−4
5.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−4
5.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
5.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
5.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
5.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
6.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−2
6.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−2
6.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−3

T-362 iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page
6.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−3
6.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−3
6.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−3
6.6.3 Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−3
6.6.4 Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−4
6.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−4
6.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−4
6.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−4
6.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−4
6.8 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−5
6.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−5
6.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−6
6.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−6
6.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−6
6.10 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−7
6.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−7
6.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−7
6.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−7
6.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−7
6.11 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−8
6.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−8
6.12 FILTER DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−9
6.13 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−9
6.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−9
6.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−9
6.14 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−10
6.14.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−10
6.14.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−10
6.14.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−10
6.15 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−10
6.16 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−11
6.16.1 Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−11
6.17 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−12
6.18 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−12
6.18.1 Economizer Expansion Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−12
6.19 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13
6.20 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−14
6.21 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.22 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.22.1 Handling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.22.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
6.22.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−16
6.22.4 Removing and Installing a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−17
6.22.5 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−17

v T-362
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page
6.23 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−18
6.23.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−18
6.23.2 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−20
6.23.3 Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−21
6.24 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−22
6.25 eAutoFresh SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−23
6.25.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−23
6.25.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−23
6.25.3 Checking the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−24
6.25.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−24
6.26 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−26
6.27 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−26
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−1
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−1

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 2−1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
Figure 2−2 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−2
Figure 2−3 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−3
Figure 2−4 Air−Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−4
Figure 2−5 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−5
Figure 2−6 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−10
Figure 2−7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−11
Figure 3−1 Temperature Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1
Figure 3−2 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−2
Figure 3−3 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
Figure 3−4 Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−3
Figure 3−5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−5
Figure 3−6 Perishable Mode Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−6
Figure 3−7 Perishable Mode Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
Figure 3−8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
Figure 3−9 Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−9
Figure 3−10 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−10
Figure 3−11 Standard Configuration Download Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−15
Figure 3−12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−28
Figure 4−1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1
Figure 4−2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−2
Figure 4−3 Diagram of Emergency Bypass Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7
Figure 6−1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
Figure 6−2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
Figure 6−3 Service Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−2
Figure 6−4 Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−3

T-362 vi
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 6−5 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−5
Figure 6−6 High Pressure Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−6
Figure 6−7 Condenser Fan Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−8
Figure 6−8 Heater Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−9
Figure 6−9 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−10
Figure 6−10 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−11
Figure 6−11 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−12
Figure 6−12 Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−12
Figure 6−13 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−13
Figure 6−14 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−15
Figure 6−15 Controller Section of the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−16
Figure 6−16 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−20
Figure 6−17 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−20
Figure 6−18 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−21
Figure 6−19 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−21
Figure 6−20 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−21
Figure 6−21 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−22
Figure 6−22 Stepper Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−23
Figure 6−23 Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−24
Figure 6−24 Motor Cup Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−25
Figure 6−25 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−26
Figure 7−1 LEGEND − Standard Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−1
Figure 7−2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−2
Figure 7−3 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−3
Figure 7−4 LEGEND − Unit With Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−5
Figure 7−5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, Unit With Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−6
Figure 7−6 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM, Unit With Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7−7

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page
Table 2−1 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−8
Table 3−1 Keypad Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−2
Table 3−2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−14
Table 3−3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−16
Table 3−4 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−19
Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−20
Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−29
Table 3−7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−37
Table 3−8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−43
Table 3−9 DataCORDER Pre-trip Result Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−44
Table 3−10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−45
Table 6−1 Valve Override Control Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−14
Table 6−2 Sensor Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−18
Table 6−3 Sensor Resistance (CPDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−19
Table 6−4 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−27
Table 6−5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−28

vii T-362
 SAFETY SUMMARY

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS

Installation and servicing of refrigeration equipment can To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain
be hazardous due to system pressures and electrical the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation
components. Only trained and qualified service is given with the appropriate consequences:
personnel should install, repair, or service refrigeration
equipment. When working on refrigeration equipment, DANGER - means an immediate hazard that WILL re-
observe all potential Danger, Warning and Caution sult in severe personal injury or death.
hazards, including those shown below and on hazard
labels attached to the unit. WARNING - means to warn against hazards or unsafe
conditions that COULD result in severe personal injury
The following general safety notices supplement or death.
specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in
this manual. They are recommended precautions that CAUTION - means to warn against potential hazard or
must be understood and applied during operation and unsafe practice that could result in personal injury, prod-
maintenance of the equipment covered herein. The uct or property damage.
general safety notices are presented in the following
three sections labeled: First Aid, Operating Precautions The statements listed below are applicable to the refrig-
and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific eration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in the recommended precautions must be understood and ap-
manual follows the general safety notices. plied during operation and maintenance of the equip-
ment covered herein.
FIRST AID
An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unat-
WARNING
tended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention im-
mediately. EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this
WARNING can result in death, serious
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS personal injury and / or property damage.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing
Always wear safety glasses. oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator product.
and condenser fans. Charge Only With R−134a: Refrigerant must
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the conform to AHRI Standard 700
work being undertaken. specification.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit
breakers and start-stop switches are turned off, and WARNING
power supply is disconnected.
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the Beware of unannounced starting of the
unit and investigate. evaporator and condenser fans. The unit
may cycle the fans and compressor unex-
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS pectedly as control requirements dictate.

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and

condenser fans. Do not open the condenser fan grille or WARNING
evaporator access panels before turning power off, dis-
connecting and securing the power plug. Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) be-
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, fore turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit
controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control circuit breaker(s) and external power
switches. Tag circuit breaker and power supply to pre- source.
vent accidental energizing of circuit.
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridg- WARNING
ing an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Prob-
lems with the system should be diagnosed, and any
necessary repairs performed by qualified service per- Make sure the power plugs are clean and
sonnel. dry before connecting to power receptacle.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or contain-
er, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the WARNING
modules in control boxes. Do not remove wire harness
from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap. Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s)
(CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch
In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extin- (ST) are in the “O” (OFF) position before
guish with CO2 (never use water). connecting to any electrical power source.

Safety−1 T−362
 WARNING CAUTION
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and
Charge water−cooled condenser or receiv-
power plug disconnected before replacing
er according to nameplate specifications to
the compressor.
ensure optimal unit performance.

WARNING
CAUTION
Before disassembly of the compressor, be
sure to relieve the internal pressure very Do not remove wire harnesses from con-
carefully by slightly loosening the cou- troller modules unless you are grounded to
plings to break the seal. the unit frame with a static safe wrist strap.

WARNING CAUTION
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
pressure regulator. Unplug all controller module wire harness
connectors before performing arc welding
WARNING on any part of the container.

Do not open the condenser fan grille before

turning power OFF and disconnecting
CAUTION
power plug.
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an
ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physi-
WARNING cally different and will result in damage to
the controller.
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the
acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT
PUT WATER INTO THE ACID - this will cause CAUTION
spattering and excessive heat.
Pre-trip inspection should not be per-
WARNING formed with critical temperature cargoes in
the container.
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution
from the skin immediately if accidental con-
tact occurs. Do not allow the solution to CAUTION
splash onto concrete.
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy, de-
WARNING humidification and bulb mode will be deac-
tivated. At the completion of Pre-Trip activi-
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers ty, economy, dehumidification and bulb
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power mode must be reactivated.
supply before working on moving parts.
CAUTION
WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm
(3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is
circuit breaker, CB1. Make sure the power to not in use, the CFS switch MUST be set to
the unit is off and power plug disconnected position “1” or the unit will not operate
before beginning installation. properly.

T−362
Safety−2
 CAUTION CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low
When a failure occurs during automatic suction pressure very quickly. Do not use
testing, the unit will suspend operation the compressor to evacuate the system
awaiting operator intervention. below 0 psig. Never operate the
compressor with the suction or discharge
service valves closed (frontseated). Internal
CAUTION damage will result from operating the
compressor in a deep vacuum.
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to comple-
tion without being interrupted, the unit will CAUTION
terminate pre-trip and display “Auto 2”
“end.” The unit will suspend operation until Take necessary steps (place plywood over
the user depresses the ENTER key!
coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor
from falling into condenser coil.

CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module
unless you are grounded to the unit frame
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode
as long as the EB switch is in the On posi- with a static safe wrist strap.
tion and the Mode Switch is in the Full Cool
position. If the cargo can be damaged by CAUTION
low temperatures, the operator must monit-
or container temperature and manually Unplug all module connectors before per-
cycle operation as required to maintain forming arc welding on any part of the con-
temperature within required limits. tainer.

CAUTION
CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a program-
ming card is inserted or removed from the
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate controller programming port.
in reverse for more than two minutes will re-
sult in internal compressor damage. Turn
the start-stop switch OFF immediately.
CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid
nicking or cutting wires.
CAUTION
CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the
manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice
suction pressure before disconnecting. area as this may affect sensor resistance.

Safety−3 T−362
 SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION 1.3.4 Compressor
The Carrier Transicold model 69NT40−561−200 − 299 The unit is fitted with a scroll compressor equipped with
series units are of lightweight aluminum frame suction and discharge service connections.
construction, designed to fit in the front of a container 1.3.5 Condenser Coil
and serve as the container’s front wall.
The unit is fitted with a two−row square formed
They are one piece, self−contained, all electric units, condenser coil using 7mm tubing.
which include cooling and heating systems to provide
precise temperature control. 1.3.6 Evaporator
The evaporator section is equipped with an electronic
The units are supplied with a complete charge of expansion valve (EEV).
refrigerant R−134a and compressor lubricating oil, and
are ready for operation upon installation. Forklift 1.3.7 Evaporator Fan Operation
pockets are provided for unit installation and removal. Units are equipped with three−phase evaporator fan
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector
3−phase, 50/60 hertz (Hz) power. An optional will shut down the unit.
autotransformer may be fitted to allow operation on 1.3.8 Plate Set
nominal 190/230, 3−phase, 50/60 Hz power. Control
system power is provided by a transformer which steps Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring
the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase. schematics and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets
are ordered using a seven−digit base part number and a
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro−Link 3 two−digit dash number.
microprocessor. The controller operates automatically
to select cooling, holding or heating as required to 1.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS
maintain the desired set point temperature within very
close limits. The unit may also be equipped with an Various options may be factory or field equipped to the
electronic temperature recorder. base unit. These options are described in the following
sub−paragraphs.
The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or
changing operating parameters. The display is also 1.4.1 Battery
equipped with lights to indicate various modes of The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard
operation. replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the
1.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION standard location or in a secure location.
Unit identification information is provided on a plate 1.4.2 Dehumidification
located on the back wall of the condenser section. The The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This
plate provides the unit model number, the unit serial sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the
number and the unit parts identification number (PID). controller. In dehumidification mode, the controller will
The model number identifies the overall unit operate to reduce internal container moisture level.
configuration, while the PID number provides
information on specific optional equipment, factory 1.4.3 USDA
provisioned to allow for field installation of optional The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional
equipment and differences in detailed parts. temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA
Cold Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER
1.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS function of the Micro−Link refrigeration controller.
1.3.1 Control Box 1.4.4 Interrogator
Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with
Units are equipped with an aluminum control box, and interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
may be fitted with a lockable door. download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be
1.3.2 Temperature Readout fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container
and the other is mounted inside the container (with the
The unit is fitted with suction and discharge refrigerant USDA receptacles).
temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be
viewed on the controller display. 1.4.5 Remote Monitoring
1.3.3 Pressure Readout The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring
receptacle. This item allows connection of remote
The unit is fitted with evaporator, suction, and discharge indicators for COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE.
pressure transducers. The transducer readings may be Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted
viewed on the controller display. at the control box location.

1−1 T−362
1.4.6 Quest − CCPC 1.4.14 460 Volt Cable
Various power cable and plug designs are available for
Compressor−Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the
method of temperature control used during cables to each customer’s requirements.
steady−state perishable cooling that cycles the
compressor on and off according to supply / return air 1.4.15 230 Volt Cable
temperature conditions. Units equipped with an autotransformer require an
additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt
1.4.7 Communications Interface Module source. Various power cable and plug designs are
available. The plug options tailor the cables to each
The unit may be fitted with a communications interface customer’s requirements.
module. The communications interface module is a 1.4.16 Cable Restraint
slave module which allows communication with a
master central monitoring station. The module will Various designs are available for storage of the power
respond to communication and return information over cables. These options are variations of the compressor
the main power line. Refer to the ship master system section cable guard.
technical manual for further information. 1.4.17 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
1.4.8 Autotransformer The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup
assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available
with a vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation fitted with screens.
on 190/230, 3−phase, 50/60 Hz power. The
autotransformer raises the supply voltage to the 1.4.18 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup
The autotransformer may also be fitted with an assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available
individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power. with a vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be
fitted with screens.
If the unit is equipped with an autotransformer and
communications module, the autotransformer will be 1.4.19 Labels
fitted with a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist in Safety Instruction and Function Code listing labels differ
communications. depending on the options installed. Labels available
with additional languages are listed in the parts list.
1.4.9 Gutters 1.4.20 Controller
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box and Two replacement controllers are available:
recorder section to divert rain away from the controls. 1. Re−manufactured − Controller is the equivalent of a
new OEM controller and is supplied with a 12−month
1.4.10 Handles warranty.
2. Repaired − Controller has had previous faults re-
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate paired and upgraded with the latest software.
access to stacked containers. These fixed handles are
located on either side of the unit. Note: Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for
warranty repairs; only full OEM Remanufactured
controllers are to be used.
1.4.11 Thermometer Port
Controllers will be factory−equipped with the latest
The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame version of operational software, but will NOT be
for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or configured for a specific model number and will need to
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a be configured at the time of installation or sale.
cap and chain. 1.4.21 Condenser Grille
1.4.12 Water Cooling Condenser grilles are direct bolted.
1.4.22 Emergency Bypass
The refrigeration system may be provisioned for a The optional Emergency Bypass switch (EB) functions
water−cooled condenser. to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure.
1.4.13 Back Panels 1.4.23 eAutoFresh
The optional eAutoFresh venting system moderates the
Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or atmospheric level inside the container unit in response
hinge mounting. to cargo respiration.

T−362 1−2
 SECTION 2
DESCRIPTION
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
2.1.1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section The function of the upper or lower makeup air vent is to
provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
The unit is designed so that the majority of the compon- circulation. A manually operated venting system is loc-
ents are accessible from the front (see Figure 2−1). The ated in the upper left access panel.
unit model number, serial number and parts identifica- The optional eAutoFresh vent system is used to moder-
tion number can be found on the serial plate on the back ate the atmospheric level in the container in response to
wall of the condenser section. cargo respiration. When transporting frozen cargo loads
the vent will be closed. The upper left access panel con-
tains the vent slide and motor assembly. It may be re-
moved to allow entry into the evaporator section where
the CO2 sensor and drive pack are located.

1
15

3
4
5

14
7

13 8

12
11 10 9

1. Access Panel (Evap. Fan #1) 9.

Supply Temperature Supply/Recorder Sensor
2. Fork Lift Pockets Assembly (STS/SRS)
3. Control Box 10. Economizer
4. Unit Display 11. Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
5. Control Panel 12. Power Cables and Plug (Location)
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 13. Autotransformer
7. Start−Stop Switch, ST 14. Condenser Grille
8. Compressor 15. Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent
Panel (Evap. Fan #2)
Figure 2−1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section

2−1 T-362
2.1.3 Evaporator Section If the unit is equipped with eAutoFresh, system compon-
ents are mounted in addition to the standard refrigera-
The evaporator section is shown below. The evaporator
tion unit components. The stepper motor component is
fans circulate air through the container by pulling it in the installed in the vent; the air filter, CO2 sensor, stepper
top of the unit, directing it through the evaporator coil
motor drive and CO2 sensing lines are installed on the
where it is heated or cooled, and discharging it at the rib of the upper grill.
bottom.
Most evaporator components are accessible by remov-
ing the upper rear panel (as shown in the illustration) or
by removing the evaporator fan access panels (see
Figure 2−1).

6 4
3
2
1

13

12
11

10 5
9

1. Evaporator Fan Motor #1 (EM1) 8. Evaporator Temperature Sensors (Location)

2. Return Recorder Sensor/Temperature Sensor (ETS1 & ETS2)
(RRS/RTS) 9. Interrogator Connector (Rear) (ICR)
3. Humidity Sensor (HS) 10. USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
4. Evaporator Fan Motor #2 (EM2) 11. USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
5. Evaporator Coil Heaters (Underside of Coil) 12. USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
6. Evaporator Coil 13. Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
7. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Figure 2−2 Evaporator Section

T-362 2−2
2.1.4 Compressor Section pressure transducer (EPT) and the suction pressure
transducer (SPT).
The compressor section includes the compressor,
digital unloader valve (DUV), high pressure switch, The supply temperature sensor and supply recorder
discharge pressure transducer (DPT), evaporator sensor are located to the left of the compressor.

9 10 11

16
12

13
2 3
14 4
5
6

15

1. Compressor 9. Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)

2. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 10. Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
(CPDS) (Location) 11. Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
3. Discharge Connection 12. High Pressure Switch (HPS)
4. Suction Connection (Location) 13. Discharge Service Valve
5. Compressor Terminal Box 14. Suction Service Valve
6. Oil Drain (Location) 15. Supply Temperature/Supply Recorder Sensor
7. Economizer Connection Assembly (STS/SRS)
8. Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 16. Warning Label
Figure 2−3 Compressor Section

2−3 T-362
2.1.5 Air−Cooled Condenser Section valve (ESV), and sight glass/moisture indicator.
The condenser fan pulls air from around the coil and
The air−cooled condenser section consists of the discharges it horizontally through the condenser fan
condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver, liquid line
grille.
service valve, filter drier, fusible plug, economizer,
economizer expansion valve, economizer solenoid

6
7 8

3 4
9

10

11

12

Two
14
locations

13

1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 8. Filter Drier

2. Condenser Fan 9. Economizer
3. Condenser Coil Cover 10. Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
4. Condenser Coil 11. Economizer Expansion Valve
5. Condenser Fan Motor 12. Warning Label (location)
6. Receiver 13. Service Access Valve
7. Sight Glass 14. Liquid Level/Moisture Indicator

Figure 2−4 Air−Cooled Condenser Section

T-362 2−4
2.1.6 Control Box Section 2.1.7 Communications Interface Module
The communications interface module is a slave
The control box (Figure 2−5) includes: the manual module which allows communication between the
operation switches, circuit breaker (CB−1), refrigeration unit and a ship system master central
compressor, fan and heater contactors, control power monitoring station. The module will respond to
transformer, fuses, key pad, display module, current communication and return information over the ships
sensor module, controller module and the main power line. Refer to the master system technical
communications interface module. manual for further information.

2 3 4

7
14

13 12 11 10 9 8

1. Compressor Contactor − CH 8. Controller Battery Pack (Standard Location)

2. Compressor Phase A Contactor − PA 9. Control Transformer
3. Compressor Phase B Contactor − PB 10. High Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor − EF
4. Heater Contactor − HR 11. Low Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor − ES
5. Controller/DataCORDER Module (Controller) 12. Condenser Fan Contactor − CF
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 13. Circuit Breaker − 460V
7. Start−Stop Switch, ST 14. Current Sensor Module
Figure 2−5 Control Box Section

2−5 T-362
2.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA

Model Number ZMD26KVE−TFD−272

a. Compressor/Motor Weight (With Oil) 42.9 kg (95 lb)
Assembly Approved Oil Uniqema Emkarate RL−32−3MAF
Oil Charge 1774 ml (60 ounces)
b. Electronic Expansion Valve Verify at −18C
Superheat (Evaporator) (0F) container box 4.4 to 6.7C (8 to 12F)
temperature
c. Economizer Expansion Verify at −18C
Valve Superheat (0F) container box 4.4 to 11.1C (8 to 20F)
temperature
Opens 54 (+/− 3) C = 130 (+/− 5) F
d. Heater Termination Thermostat
Closes 38 (+/− 4) C = 100 (+/− 7) F
Cut−Out 25 (+/− 1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/− 10) psig
e. High Pressure Switch
Cut−In 18 (+/− 0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/− 10) psig

WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal injury
and / or property damage.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.
Charge Only With R−134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
Conforming to AHRI standard 700
f. Refrigerant R−134a specifications.

CAUTION
Charge water−cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate
specifications to ensure optimal unit performance.
4.54 kg
g. Refrigerant Charge Receiver (10 lbs)
Melting point 99C = (210F)
h. Fusible Plug
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft−lbs)
Bursts at 35 +/− 5% kg/cm2 = (500 +/− 5% psig)
i. Rupture Disc
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft−lbs)
j. Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
Cut−In 0.5 +/− 0.2 kg/cm2 (7 +/− 3 psig)
k. Water Pressure Switch
Cutout 1.6 +/− 0.4 kg/cm2 (22 +/− 5 psig)

T-362 2−6
2.3 ELECTRICAL DATA
CB−1 (25 amp) Trips at 29 amps
a. Circuit Breaker CB−2 (50 amp) Trips at 62.5 amps
CB−2 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5 amps
b. Compressor
Motor Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 VAC
380 VAC, Three Phase, 460 VAC, Three Phase,
Nominal Supply
50 Hz 60 Hz
c. Condenser Fan Full Load Amps .71 amps .72 amps
Motor Horsepower 0.21 hp 0.36 hp
Rotations Per Minute 1450 rpm 1750 rpm
Voltage and Frequency 360 − 460 VAC +/− 2.5 Hz 400 − 500 VAC +/− 2.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation Counter−clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Number of Heaters 6
d. Evaporator Coil Rating 750 watts +5/−10% each @ 230 VAC
Heaters Resistance (cold) 66.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20C (68F)
Type Sheath
380 VAC/3 PH/50 Hz 460 VAC/3 PH/60 Hz
Full Load Amps
1.07 .9
High Speed
Full Load Amps
0.47 0.47
Low Speed
Nominal Horsepower
0.36 0.63
High Speed
e. Evaporator Fan Nominal Horsepower
0.05 0.8
Motor(s) Low Speed
Rotations Per Minute
2850 rpm 3450 rpm
High Speed
Rotations Per Minute
1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Low Speed
Voltage and Frequency 360 − 460 VAC +/− 1.25 Hz 400 − 500 VAC +/− 1.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A,F3B)
f. Fuses Controller/DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)
Emergency Bypass 10 amps (FEB)
Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range
g. Vent Positioning Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/− 10%
Sensor
Supply Current 5 mA (typical)
h. Solenoid Valve Nominal Resistance @ 7.7 ohms +/− 5%
Coils (ESV) 77F (25C)
24 VDC Maximum Current Draw 0.7 amps
Nominal Resistance @
i. DUV Coils 14.8 ohms +/− 5%
77F (20C)
12 VDC
Maximum Current Draw 929 mA
Coil Feed to Ground
j. EEV Nominal (Gray Wire) 47 ohms
Resistance
Coil Feed to Coil Feed 95 ohms

2−7 T-362
Section 2.3 − ELECTRICAL DATA−CONTINUED
Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 VDC
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 VDC
k. Humidity Sensor
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99 V
50% 1.65 V
70% 2.31 V
90% 2.97 V

2.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Unit components are protected from damage by safety Open safety switch contacts on device IP−CM will shut
and protective devices listed in Table 2−1. These de- down the condenser fan motor.
vices monitor the unit operating conditions and open a
set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition oc-
The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the
curs.
following safety devices open: (a) circuit breaker(s); (b)
Open safety switch contacts on either or both of devices fuse (F3A/F3B, 7.5A); or (c) evaporator fan motor in-
IP−CP or HPS will shut down the compressor. ternal protector(s) − (IP).

Table 2−1 Safety and Protective Devices

UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING

Circuit Breaker (CB−1, 25 amp) − Manual Reset Trips at 29 amps (460 VAC)
Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB−2, 50 amp) − Manual Reset Trips at 62.5 amps (230 VAC)
Circuit Breaker (CB−2, 70 amp) − Manual Reset Trips at 87.5 amps (230 VAC)
Excessive current draw in the
control circuit Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating

Excessive current draw by the

controller Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating

Excessive current draw by the

Emergency Bypass module Fuse (FEB) 10 amp rating

Excessive condenser fan

motor winding temperature Internal Protector (IP−CM) − Automatic Reset N/A

Excessive compressor motor

winding temperature Internal Protector (IP−CP) − Automatic Reset N/A

Excessive evaporator fan

motor(s) winding temperature Internal Protector(s) (IP−EM) − Automatic Reset N/A

Fusible Plug − Used on the Receiver 99C = (210F)

Abnormal pressures/tempera-
tures in the high refrigerant Rupture Disc − Used on the Water−Cooled Con- 35 kg/cm2 = (500 psig)
side denser
Abnormally high discharge Opens at 25 kg/cm2
pressure High Pressure Switch (HPS) (350 psig)

T-362 2−8
2.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT 2.5.2 Economized Operation
2.5.1 Standard Operation
In the economized mode, (see Figure 2−7) the frozen
Starting at the compressor, (see Figure 2−6, upper and pull down capacity of the unit is increased by sub-
schematic) the suction gas is compressed to a higher cooling the liquid refrigerant entering the electronic ex-
pressure and temperature. pansion valve. Overall efficiency is increased because
The refrigerant gas flows through the discharge line and the gas leaving the economizer enters the compressor
continues into the air−cooled condenser. When operat- at a higher pressure, therefore requiring less energy to
ing with the air−cooled condenser active, air flowing compress it to the required condensing conditions.
across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to saturation
temperature. By removing latent heat, the gas con- Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is tak-
denses to a high pressure/high temperature liquid and en from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter drier.
flows to the receiver, which stores the additional charge The flow is activated when the controller energizes the
necessary for low temperature operation. economizer solenoid valve (ESV).
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line,
the filter drier (which keeps refrigerant clean and dry) The liquid refrigerant flows through the ESV to the ex-
and the economizer (not active during standard opera- pansion valve internal passages, absorbing heat from
tion) to the electronic expansion valve (EEV). the liquid refrigerant flowing to the electronic expansion
valve. The resultant “medium” temperature/pressure
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable gas enters the compressor at the economizer port fit-
orifice of the EEV, the pressure drops to suction ting.
pressure. In this process some of the liquid vaporizes to
a gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining When the control air temperature falls to 2.0C (3.6F)
liquid. The liquid exits as a low pressure, low above set point, the DUV unloads the compressor’s
temperature, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from scroll and begins to reduce the capacity of the unit. Per-
the return air by the balance of the liquid, causing it to centage of the unit capacity is accessed through code
vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows select 01 (Cd01). For example, if Cd01 displays 70, it in-
through the suction tube back to the compressor. dicates that the compressor is operating unloaded with
During the standard mode of operation, the normally the DUV engaged 30% of the time.
closed digital unloader valve (DUV) controls the system
refrigerant flow and capacity by loading and unloading 2.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve
the compressor in frequent discrete time intervals. If the
system capacity has been decreased to the lowest al- The microprocessor controls the superheat leaving the
lowable capacity with the DUV, the unit will enter a trim evaporator via the electronic expansion valve (EEV),
heat mode of operation, during which the controller will based on inputs from the evaporator pressure trans-
pulse the evaporator heaters in sequence with the com- ducer (EPT). The microprocessor transmits electronic
pressor digital signal in order to absorb the excess capa- pulses to the EEV stepper motor, which opens or closes
city. the valve orifice to maintain the superheat set point.

2−9 T-362
 STANDARD OPERATION

COMBO
ETS1 AND 2
EVAPORATOR

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION
VALVE

SIGHT
CONDENSER GLASS
FILTER
DRIER

LIQUID LEVEL/
MOISTURE
INDICATOR LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE
RECEIVER

DIGITAL
DISCHARGE UNLOADER
ECON. TXV
TEMPERATURE VALVE
SENSING BULB
SENSOR
ECONOMIZER
SOLENOID
VALVE

DISCHARGE
ECONOMIZER DISCHARGE
SERVICE
TXV PRESSURE
VALVE
TRANSDUCER

ECONOMIZER EVAPORATOR PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER
SUCTION PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER

SUCTION
SERVICE
VALVE

COMPRESSOR

Figure 2−6 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Standard Operation

T-362 2−10
 ECONOMIZED OPERATION

COMBO ETS1
AND ETS2
EVAPORATOR

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION
VALVE

CONDENSER SIGHT
GLASS

FILTER
DRIER

LIQUID LEVEL/
MOISTURE
INDICATOR LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE
RECEIVER

DIGITAL
DISCHARGE UNLOADER
ECON. TXV TEMPERATURE VALVE
SENSING BULB SENSOR
ECONOMIZER
SOLENOID
VALVE

DISCHARGE DISCHARGE
PRESSURE SERVICE
ECONOMIZER TRANSDUCER VALVE
TXV

ECONOMIZER EVAPORATOR PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER
SUCTION PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
SUCTION
SERVICE
VALVE

COMPRESSOR

Figure 2−7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Economized Operation

2−11 T-362
 SECTION 3
MICROPROCESSOR
3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL The DataCORDER software functions to record unit
MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM operating parameters and cargo temperature
parameters for future retrieval. Coverage of the
temperature control software begins with paragraph 3.2.
The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor Coverage of the DataCORDER software is provided in
system (see Figure 3−1) consists of a keypad, display paragraph 3.8.
module, the control module (controller) and The keypad and display module serve to provide user
interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the access and readouts for both of the controller functions,
temperature control software and the DataCORDER temperature control and DataCORDER. The functions
software. The temperature control software functions to are accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the
operate the unit components as required to provide the display module. The components are designed to
desired cargo temperature and humidity. permit ease of installation and removal.

DISPLAY MODULE
CONTROL MODULE

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SOFTWARE

KEYPAD

CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS Pre-trip

SOFTWARE SOFTWARE (AL<73)
INTERROGATION
CONNECTOR

CONFIGURATION FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY
CODE (Cd)
(CnF##)

DataCORDER SOFTWARE

DATA
CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS STORAGE Computer Device
SOFTWARE SOFTWARE (AL>69) MEMORY With DataLINE
Software
Operation/Config.
CONFIGURATION TO PCMCIA CARD
FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY DISPLAY Data Bank
CODE (dC)
(dCF## read only) (Scrollback) PCMCIA CARD

Figure 3−1 Temperature Control System

3−1 T-362
3.1.1 Keypad Table 3−1 Keypad Function

The keypad (Figure 3−2) is mounted on the control box KEY FUNCTION
door. The keypad consists of eleven push button CODE SELECT Accesses function codes.
switches that act as the user’s interface with the control-
ler. Descriptions of the switch functions are provided in Displays Pre-trip selection menu.
PRE TRIP Discontinues Pre-trip in progress.
Table 3−1.
Displays alarm list and clears the
ALARM LIST alarm queue.
MANUAL Displays selected defrost mode.
DEFROST / Depress and hold the MANUAL
INTERVAL DEFROST / INTERVAL key for
five (5) seconds to initiate defrost
CODE PRE
using the same logic as if the op-
SELECT TRIP tional manual defrost switch was
toggled on.
MANUAL
ALARM Confirms a selection or saves a
LIST
DEFROST/ ENTER selection to the controller.
INTERVAL

Change or scroll a selection up.

Arrow Up Pre-trip advance or test interrupt.
Change or scroll selection down-
Arrow Down ward. Pre-trip repeat backward.
ENTER
RETURN / Display non-controlling probe tem-
SUPPLY perature (momentary display).
Display alternate English/Metric
scale (momentary display). When
set to F, pressure is displayed in
Celsius / psig and vacuum in “/hg.” “P” ap-
pears after the value to indicate
Fahrenheit psig and “i” appears for inches of
RETURN C
mercury. When set to C, pressure
SUPPLY
readings are in bars. “b” appears
F
after the value to indicate bars.
Initiate battery backup mode to al-
BATTERY ALT.
BATTERY low set point & function code se-
POWER MODE POWER lection if AC power is not con-
nected.
This key is pressed to switch the
functions from temperature soft-
ware to the DataCORDER soft-
ware. The remaining keys function
ALT MODE the same as described above ex-
Figure 3−2 Keypad cept the readings or changes are
made to the DataCORDER pro-
3.1.2 Display Module gramming.

The display module (Figure 3−3) consists of two 5-digit NOTE

displays and seven indicator lights. The indicator lights The controlling probe in perishable range is the
include: SUPPLY air probe and the controlling probe in
1. COOL - White or Blue LED: Energized when the re- frozen range is the RETURN air probe.
frigerant compressor is energized. 5. SUPPLY - Yellow LED: Energized when the supply
air probe is used for control. When this LED is illu-
2. HEAT - Orange LED: Energized to indicate heater minated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEM-
operation in heat mode, defrost mode, or PERATURE display is the reading at the supply air
dehumidification. probe. This LED will flash if dehumidification or hu-
midification is enabled.
3. DEFROST - Orange LED: Energized when the unit
is in defrost mode. 6. RETURN - Yellow LED: Energized when the return
air probe is used for control. When this LED is illu-
4. IN RANGE - Green LED: Energized when the con- minated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEM-
trolled temperature probe is within the specified toler- PERATURE display is the reading at the return air
ance of set point. probe.
7. ALARM - Red LED: Energized when an active or an
inactive shutdown alarm in the alarm queue.

T-362 3−2
 3.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
The controller software is a custom designed program
COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN that is subdivided into configuration software and opera-
tional software. The controller software performs the fol-
lowing functions:
a. Control supply or return air temperature to required
SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data
limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation,
economized operation, unloaded operation, electric
heat control, and defrost. Defrost is performed to
clear buildup of frost and ice to ensure proper air flow
across the evaporator coil.
b. Provide default independent readouts of set point and
Figure 3−3 Display Module supply or return air temperatures.
3.1.3 Controller
c. Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify the
CAUTION configuration software variables, operating software
Function Codes and Alarm Code indications.

Do not remove wire harnesses from con- d. Provide a Pre-trip step-by-step checkout of refrigera-
troller modules unless you are grounded to tion unit performance including: proper component
the unit frame with a static safe wrist strap. operation, electronic and refrigeration control opera-
tion, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure
limiting and current limiting settings.
CAUTION
e. Provide battery-powered ability to access or change
Unplug all controller module wire harness selected codes and set point without AC power
connected.
connectors before performing arc welding
on any part of the container. f. Provide the ability to reprogram the software through
the use of a memory card.
CAUTION 3.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an Configuration software is a variable listing of the
ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physi- components available for use by the operational
cally different and will result in damage to software. This software is factory installed in
the controller. accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed
on the original purchase order. Changes to the
NOTE configuration software are required only when a new
Do not attempt to service the controller mod- controller has been installed or a physical change has
been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of
ules. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.
an option. A configuration variable list is provided in
The Micro-Link 3 controller is shown in Figure 3−4. It is Table 3−4. Change to the factory-installed configuration
fitted with test points, harness connectors and a soft- software is achieved via a configuration card or by
ware card programming port. communications.

1 2 3 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3

1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

2. Micro-Link 3 Control/DataCORDER Module 6. Control Circuit Power Connection
3. Connectors 7. Software Programming Port
4. Test Points 8. Battery Pack (Standard Location)

Figure 3−4 Control Module

3−3 T-362
3.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) During Bump Start, the EEV will close. Relays TS, TQ,
TN, TE, and TV will be de-energized (opened). The res-
The operational software is the actual operation ult of this action will close the ESV and shut all fans off.
programming of the controller which activates or The compressor will start for 1 second, then pause for
deactivates components in accordance with current unit five seconds. This sequence will be repeated two more
operating conditions and selected modes of operation. times. After the final bump start the unit will pre-position
the EEV to the correct starting position, pause and start
up.
The programming is divided into function codes. Some
of the codes are read only, while the remaining codes 3.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control
may be user configured. The value of the user
configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with In Perishable Mode, the controller maintains the supply
user desired mode of operation. A list of the function air temperature at set point, the SUPPLY indicator light
codes is provided in Table 3−5. is illuminated and the default reading on the display win-
dow is the supply temperature sensor reading.
To access the function codes:
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range
temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE
a. Press CODE SELECT, then press an arrow key until light will energize.
the left window displays the desired function code.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to
b. The right window will display the selected function -10C, perishable mode is active with set points above
code value for five seconds before returning to nor- -10C (+14F). When CnF26 is set to -5C, perishable
mal display mode. mode is active with set points above -5C (+23F).
3.3.4 Perishable Pulldown
c. If additional time is required, pressing the ENTER key
will extend the display time to 30 seconds. When the system is in Perishable Pulldown Mode, the
highest priority is given to bringing the container down to
set point. When cooling from a temperature that is more
than 2.5C (4.5F) above set point, the system will be in
3.3 MODES OF OPERATION perishable pulldown mode in economized operation.
General operation sequences for cooling, heating and However, pressure and current limit functions may re-
defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs. strict the valve if either exceeds the preset value.
Schematic representation of controller operation is 3.3.5 Perishable Steady State
provided in Figure 3−5 & Figure 3−8.
Perishable Steady State is used to maintain the control
temperature near a setpoint that is above the heat lock-
Operational software responds to various inputs. These out temperature.
inputs come from the temperature sensors and
pressure transducers, the temperature set point, the Once set point is reached, the unit will transition to per-
settings of the configuration variables and the function ishable steady state mode. This results in unloaded op-
code assignments. The action taken by the operational eration by cycling the DUV to limit capacity and maintain
software changes as the input values change. Overall steady temperature control.
interaction of the inputs is described as a “mode” of The unit is capable of maintaining supply air tempera-
operation. The modes of operation include perishable ture to within +/-0.2C (+/-0.36F) of set point. Supply
(chill) mode and frozen mode. Descriptions of the air temperature is controlled by positioning of the elec-
controller interaction and modes of operation are tronic expansion valve (EEV), cycling of the digital un-
provided in the following sub paragraphs. loader valve (DUV), cycling of the compressor, and cycl-
ing of the heaters.
3.3.1 Start up - Compressor Phase Sequence 3.3.6 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation
At start up, the controller logic checks for proper phase Perishable Idle Mode is used when it is unnecessary to
sequencing and compressor rotation. If incorrect se- run the compressor to maintain control temperature. If
quencing is causing the compressor and three-phase the controller has determined that cooling is not required
evaporator fan motors to rotate in the wrong direction, or the controller logic determines suction pressure is at
the controller will energize or de-energize relay TCP as the low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perish-
required (see Figure 7-2). Relay TCP will switch its con- able Idle Mode. During Perishable Idle Mode, the com-
tacts, energizing or de-energizing relays PA and PB. pressor is turned off, but the evaporator fans continue to
Relay PA is wired to energize the circuits on L1, L2 and run to circulate air throughout the container. If tempera-
L3. Relay PB is wired to energize the circuits on L3, L2, ture rises +0.2C above set point, the unit will transition
and L1, thus providing reverse rotation. back to perishable steady state.
3.3.7 Perishable Heating
3.3.2 Start up - Compressor Bump Start When it is necessary to raise the control temperature,
the system will enter Perishable Heating Mode. If the
At start up, the controller logic will initiate a compressor temperature drops to 0.5C (0.9F) below set point, the
bump start procedure to clear liquid refrigerant from the unit will transition to Perishable Heating Mode, and the
compressor. If suction and discharge pressures have heaters will be energized. The unit will transition back to
equalized, the compressor will perform three com- Perishable Idle Mode when the temperature rises to
pressor bump starts. A compressor bump start may also 0.2C (0.4F) below the set point, and the heaters will
occur after a defrost cycle has been completed. de-energize.

T-362 3−4
 Perishable Mode Pull Down
(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE −10°C (+14°F),
Controller Set Point ABOVE −10°C (+14°F),
or−5°C (+23°F) optionally
or−5°C (+23°F) optionally

+2.5°C
(+4.5°F)
Cooling, Cooling,
Unloaded Economized
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ +.20°C

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Set
Cooling, Point
−.20°C ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Air Circulation −.20°C Unloaded
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
−.20°C
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ −.20°C
−.50°C
−.50°C ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍAir Circulation

Heating
Heating

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

Figure 3−5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode

3.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification If any condition except item (1) becomes false OR if the
Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidifica-
levels inside the container, the dehumidification set tion set point, the high speed evaporator fans will be
point range is from 50% to 95%. Dehumidification is energized.
activated when a humidity value is set at Cd33. The During dehumidification power is applied to the defrost
yellow SUPPLY LED will flash ON and OFF every heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to
second to indicate that dehumidification is active. Once open the EEV to match the increased heat load while
dehumidification is active and the following conditions still holding the supply air temperature very close to the
are satisfied, the controller will activate the heat relay to set point.
begin dehumidification. Opening the EEV reduces the temperature of the
1. The humidity sensor reading is above the humidity evaporator coil surface, which increases the rate at
set point (Cd33). which water is condensed and removes water from the
2. The unit is in perishable steady state and supply air passing air. Removing water from the air reduces the
temperature is less than 0.25C (0.45F) above set relative humidity. When the relative humidity sensed is
point. 2% below set point, the controller de-energizes the heat
3. The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has relay. The controller will continue to cycle heating to
timed out. maintain relative humidity below the selected set point.
4. Heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed. If dehumidification is terminated by a condition other
If the above conditions are true for at least one hour the than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or
evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low compressor shutdown condition, the heat relay is
speed. Evaporator fan speed will then switch every de-energized immediately.
hour, as long as the 4 conditions are met (see Bulb
Mode, Section 3.3.9 for different evaporator fan speed
options).

3−5 T-362
Two timers are activated during dehumidification to pre- In order to initiate economy fan mode, a perishable set
vent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear: point must be selected prior to activation. When econ-
omy fan mode is active, the evaporator fans will be con-
1. Heater debounce timer (three minutes) - The heater trolled as follows:
debounce timer is started whenever the heater
contactor status is changed. The heat contactor re- At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the
mains energized (or de-energized) for at least three evaporator fans will run in high speed for three
minutes even if the set point criteria are satisfied. minutes. They will then be switched to low speed any
time the supply air temperature is within +/- 0.2C
2. Out-of-range timer (five minutes) - The out-of-range (0.36F) of the set point and the return air temperature
timer is started to maintain heater operation during a is less than or equal to the supply air temperature
temporary out-of-range condition. If supply air tem- +3C (5.4F). The fans will continue to run in low
perature remains outside of the user selected speed for one hour. At the end of the hour, the
in-range setting for more than five minutes, the heat- evaporator fans will switch back to high speed and the
ers will be de-energized to allow the system to recov- cycle will be repeated. If bulb mode is active, economy
er. The out-of-range timer starts as soon as temper- fan mode will be overridden.
ature exceeds in-range tolerance value set by Cd30.
3.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode
3.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which Operation
allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or
defrost termination set points. NOTE
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once In Standard Perishable Mode, the evaporator
bulb mode is activated, the user may then change motors run in high speed. In Economy Fan
dehumidification evaporator fan operation from the Mode, the fan speed is varied.
default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to
constant low or constant high speed. This is done by a. When supply air temperature is above set point and
toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as decreasing, the unit will cool with the condenser fan
desired. If low speed evaporator fan operation is motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), and evaporator
selected, this gives the user the additional capability of fan motors (EF) energized, and the white COOL light
selecting dehumidification set points from 50 to 95%. illuminated. (See Figure 3−6). Also, if current or
pressure limiting is not active, the controller will close
In addition, if bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to contacts TS to open the economizer solenoid valve
override the previous defrost termination thermostat (ESV) and place the unit in economized operation.
(DTT) settings. The temperature at which the DTT will
be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1C (0.2F) ENERGIZED
increments] to any value between 25.6C (78F) and DE-ENERGIZED
4C (39.2F). The temperature at which the DTT is ST
considered closed for interval timer start or demand F 24 VOLT POWER
defrost is 10C (50F) for “open” values from 25.6C HPS TC CH
(78F) down to a 10C (50F) setting. For “open” values
lower than 10C, the “closed” values will decrease to the
same value as the “open” setting. Bulb mode is IP-CM TN CF
terminated when:
TV EF ES
1. Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF
2. Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
HTT TH HR
3. The user changes the set point to one that is in the
frozen range. TS ESV

When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above condi-

tions, evaporator fan operation for dehumidification
reverts to “alt” and the DTS termination setting resets to
the value determined by CnF41.
Figure 3−6 Perishable Mode Cooling
b. When supply air temperature decreases to a prede-
3.3.10 Perishable Economy termined tolerance above set point (Cd30), the green
IN RANGE light is illuminated.
Economy fan mode is an extension of the Perishable
Mode, and is provided for power saving purposes. Eco- c. As air temperature continues to fall, unloaded cooling
nomy fan mode is activated when Cd34 (also used for starts (DUV pulses opens) as the supply air temper-
Frozen Economy Mode) is set to “ON.” Economy fan ature approaches set point. (See Figure 3−5).
mode is used in the transportation of temperature-toler- d. When unloaded cooling starts, EEV control will trans-
ant cargo or non-respiration items which do not require ition from a full cool superheat set point to a lower
high airflow for removing respiration heat. modulated cool superheat set point. Once unloading
There is no active display that indicates that economy starts, the EEV controls evaporator superheat based
fan mode has been initiated. To check for economy fan on the system duty cycle where instantaneous super-
mode, perform a manual display of Cd34. heat will vary.

T-362 3−6
e. When the supply air temperature has fallen to within ENERGIZED
1.9C (3.4F) of set point temperature and the aver- DE-ENERGIZED

age capacity of the system has fallen below 70%, the ST

24 VOLT POWER
F
unit will open contacts TS to close the ESV and take
the unit out of economized operation. HPS TC CH

CF
f. The controller continuously monitors supply air tem- IP-CM TN

perature. Once the supply air temperature falls below TV EF ES

set point, the controller periodically records supply air
temperature, set point and time. A calculation is then IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF
performed to determine temperature drift from set
TH HR
point over time. If the calculation determines that HTT

cooling is no longer required, contacts TC and TN are

ESV
opened to de-energize the compressor motor and the TS

condenser fan motor. In addition the controller will

close the EEV.
Figure 3−7 Perishable Mode Heating
g. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate
air throughout the container. The green IN RANGE NOTE
light remains illuminated as long as the supply air The EEV and DUV are independently operated
temperature is within tolerance of the set point. by the microprocessor. For full diagrams and
legend, see Section 7.
h. If the supply air temperature increases to 1.0C
(1.8F) above set point and three minutes have 3.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat
elapsed, contacts TC and TN close to restart the If the system capacity has been decreased to the lowest
compressor and condenser fan motors in standard allowable capacity and conditions exist that warrant max-
mode (non-economized) operation. The white COOL imum temperature stability the controller will pulse the HR
light is also illuminated. relay to energize the evaporator heaters in sequence with
the compressor digital signal.
i. If the average system capacity has risen to 100% dur- 3.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control
ing unloaded cooling and three minutes off time has In Frozen Mode, the controller maintains the return air
elapsed, relay TS will energize to open the ESV, pla- temperature at set point, the yellow RETURN indicator
cing the unit in economized mode. light is illuminated, and the default reading on the display
window is the return temperature sensor (RTS) reading.
j. If the supply air increases more than 2.5C (4.5F) When the return air temperature enters the in-range
above set point temperature, the microprocessor will temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE
light will energize.
transition the evaporator superheat control from
modulation back to full cool control. When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to
-10C, frozen mode is active with set points below
-10C (+14F). When CnF26 is set to -5C, frozen
3.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of mode is active with set points below -5C (+23F).
Operation
When the system is in Frozen Mode, the highest priority
is given to bringing the container down to set point, the
a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5C system will remain in economized operation.
(0.9F) below set point, the system enters the heating 3.3.15 Frozen Steady State
mode. (See Figure 3−5). The controller closes con-
tacts TH (see Figure 3−7) to allow power flow through Frozen cargos are not sensitive to minor temperature
the heat termination thermostat (HTT) to energize the changes, and the frozen temperature control system
heaters (HR). The orange HEAT light is also illumin- takes advantage of this to greatly improve the energy ef-
ficiency of the unit. Frozen range temperature control is
ated. The evaporator fans continue to run to circulate accomplished by cycling the compressor on and off as
air throughout the container. the load demand requires.
Once the frozen set point is reached, the unit will transi-
b. When the supply air temperature rises to 0.2C tion to frozen steady state (economized operation).
(0.4F) below set point, contact TH opens to de-ener-
gize the heaters. The orange HEAT light is also 3.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode
de-energized. The evaporator fans continue to run to When temperature drops to set point minus 0.2C
circulate air throughout the container. (0.4F) and the compressor has run for at least five min-
utes, the unit will transition to the frozen idle mode. The
compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans contin-
c. The safety heater termination thermostat (HTT) is at- ue to run to circulate air throughout the container. If tem-
tached to an evaporator coil circuit and will open the perature rises above set point +0.2C, (0.4F) the unit
heating circuit if overheating occurs. will transition back to the frozen steady state mode.

3−7 T-362
 Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW −10°C (+14°F),
or −5°C (+23°F) optionally

+2.5°C
(+4.5°F)

Cooling,
Economized

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ +.20°C
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Set Point
−.20°C
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Air Circulation

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

Figure 3−8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode

3.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode 3.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of

Operation
If the temperature drops 10C (18F) below set point,
the unit will transition to the frozen “heating” mode. The a. When the return air temperature is above set point
evaporator fans are brought to high speed, and the heat and decreasing, the unit will transition to economized
from the fans is circulated through the container. The cooling with the condenser fan motor (CF), com-
unit will transition back to frozen steady state when the pressor motor (CH), economizer solenoid valve
temperature rises back to the transition point. (ESV), low speed evaporator fan motors (ES) ener-
3.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode gized and the white COOL light illuminated. (See
Figure 3−9).
In order to activate Frozen Economy Mode, a frozen set
point temperature must be selected, and Cd34 b. When the return air temperature decreases to a pre-
(Economy Mode) set to “ON.” When economy mode is determined tolerance above set point, the green IN-
active, the system will perform normal frozen mode RANGE light is illuminated.
operations except that the entire refrigeration system,
excluding the controller, will be turned off when the c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2C
control temperature is less than or equal to the set point (0.4F) below set point, contacts TC, TS and TN are
-2C (4F). opened to de-energize the compressor, economizer
solenoid valve and condenser fan motor. The white
After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn COOL light is also de-energized. The EEV will close.
on high speed evaporator fans for three minutes, and
then check the control temperature. If the control d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low
temperature is greater than or equal to the frozen set speed to circulate air throughout the container. The
point +0.2C (0.4F), the unit will restart the green IN-RANGE light remains illuminated as long as
refrigeration system and continue to cool until the the return air is within tolerance of set point.
off-cycle temperature criteria are met. If the control
temperature is less than the frozen set point +0.2C e. If return air temperature drops to 10C (18F) or
(0.4F) the unit will turn off the evaporator fans and more below set point, the evaporator fans increase to
restart another 60 minute off-cycle. high speed.

T-362 3−8
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2C 3.3.21 Automatic Defrost
(0.4F) above set point and three minutes have
elapsed, the EEV opens and contacts TC, TS and TN In perishable mode, perishable-pull down mode, or
close to restart the compressor, open the ESV and frozen mode, automatic defrost starts with an initial de-
restart the condenser fan motor. The white COOL is frost set to three hours and then adjusts the interval to
illuminated. the next defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the
evaporator coil. In this way, defrosts are scheduled to
ENERGIZED
occur only when necessary.
DE-ENERGIZED
ST In frozen mode, once the frozen set point has been
F 24 VOLT POWER reached, automatic defrost will set the time interval to 12
HPS TC CH hours for the first two defrosts, and then adjust to 24
hours thereafter.
IP-CM TN CF
All defrost interval times reflect the number of com-
TV EF ES pressor run time hours since the last defrost cycle. The
minimum defrost interval in the automatic setting is
IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF three hours while the maximum is 24, refer to Section
3.3.22, Defrost Intervals for more information.
TH
HTT HR
In frozen mode the amount of actual time necessary to
accumulate defrost interval time will exceed the defrost
TS ESV interval time by a factor of two to three depending on the
compressor duty-cycle. Defrost interval time is only ac-
cumulated when the compressor is running, and the De-
frost Termination Sensor (DTS) reads less than 10C
(50F), at which point the Defrost Termination Thermo-
stat (DTT) is considered closed.
Figure 3−9 Frozen Mode
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature
reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermo-
NOTE stat (HTT), the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters
The EEV and DUV are independently operated (AL59 & AL60). If the HTT does not open and termina-
tion does not occur within two hours, the controller will
by the microprocessor. Complete schematics terminate defrost. AL60 will be activated to inform of a
and legends are located in Section 7. possible DTS failure.
3.3.20 Defrost 3.3.22 Defrost Initiation

Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evap- Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the De-
orator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the frost Temperature Thermostat (DTT). The functionality
cooling capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may con- of the DTT is controlled by the system software, based
sist of up to three distinct operations. The first is de-icing on the temperature reading of the Defrost Termination
of the coil, the second is a probe check cycle and the Sensor (DTS). In the case of a failed DTS, the RTS may
third is snap freeze. be used to determine the state of the DTT.

De-icing of the coil consists of removing power to the Defrost cannot be initiated when the DTT is considered
cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, OPEN, because an open DTT indicates that the temper-
condenser fan), closing the EEV, and turning on the ature is too high for ice to build up. Defrost can only oc-
heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil. cur when the temperature sensed by the DTS is low
During normal operation, de-icing will continue until enough to CLOSE the DTT.
temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been If the DTT is closed and the unit is in Perishable or
removed, proper air flow has been restored, and the unit Frozen Mode, then defrost can be initiated when any
is ready to control temperature efficiently. one of the following additional conditions become true:
After de-icing, and depending on unit configuration, a 1. Manual defrost is initiated by the operator. The
Defrost/Probe Check and/or Snap Freeze may occur: Manual Defrost Switch (MDS), located on the front of
the unit, is a momentary toggle switch that must be
During Defrost / Probe Check, the evaporator fans held closed until defrost is initiated. The MDS is ig-
are allowed to run for a period of time after de-icing in nored during Pretrip, and the DTT must be con-
order to validate the accuracy of the temperature sidered CLOSED for MDS activation to work.
sensors, and confirm that defrost was executed prop-
erly. Refer to Section 4.9, Probe Diagnostics for addi- Manual defrost can also be initiated by pressing the
tional information. MANUAL DEFROST/INTERVAL key for greater
than 5 seconds, or pressing the PRE TRIP key and
Defrost / Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a the ALT MODE key for greater than 5 seconds. If the
period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans two key method is used the display may show “P” or
turned off. This allows for the removal of latent “Dc” while waiting for defrost to initiate.
de-icing heat from the evaporator coils, and freezes
any remaining moisture that might otherwise be 2. The Defrost Interval Timer reaches or exceeds the
blown into the container. Defrost Interval.

3−9 T-362
3. During Pretrip, defrost may occur during tests P-8, When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the EEV,
and P-10. Defrost is forced during Pretrip test P-9. opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV) to de-energize
the compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans.
4. Temperature Probe Diagnostics logic determines The white COOL light is also de-energized. The control-
that a Probe Check is necessary based on temperat- ler then closes contacts TH to supply power to the heat-
ure values currently reported by the supply and re- ers, and the orange DEFROST light is illuminated.
turn probes. When the DTS reading rises to the DTT setting, the
de-icing operation is terminated.
5. An Initiate Defrost command is sent via communica-
tions.
ENERGIZED
6. The microprocessor can determine if defrost is re- DE-ENERGIZED
quired by calculating the difference between return ST
air temperature and supply air temperature (Delta F 24 VOLT POWER

T). If the temperature difference between return air TC PB

HPS
and supply air is too great, it indicates reduced air-
flow over the evaporator coil, and a defrost cycle
CF
may be required: IP-CM TN

TV EF ES
a. In Perishable Pull Down - Defrost will be initiated if
Delta T increases to greater than 12C, DTT is IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF
closed, and 90 minutes of compressor run time
have been recorded. HTT TH HR

b. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T TS ESV

increases to greater than 16C, DTT is closed, and
90 minutes of compressor run time have been re-
corded.

c. In Perishable Steady State – A baseline Delta T is

used to determine when defrost should be activ- Figure 3−10 Defrost
ated. The baseline is recorded after completion of
an initial defrost cycle. In order to record a baseline
Delta T, the unit must be cooling, and the evaporat- NOTE
or fans and heaters must remain in a stable state The EEV and DUV are independently operated
for a period of five minutes. Defrost will then be initi-
ated if Delta T increases to greater than 4C above by the microprocessor. Complete schematics
the baseline, the DTT is closed, and 90 minutes of and legends are located in Section 7.
compressor run time have been recorded.
3.3.23 Defrost Interval

NOTE There are two modes for defrost initiation, user-selected

timed intervals and automatic control.
During defrost, the Defrost Relay is energized,
the orange DEFROST light is illuminated, and The user-selected values are (OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, 24
the orange HEAT light is illuminated. hours, AUTO, or PuLS; factory default is 3 hours.

Defrost may be initiated any time the DTS reading falls Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three
below the set point. Defrost will terminate when the DTS hours and then adjusts the interval to the next defrost
reading rises above the DTT set point. The DTT is not a based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil.
physical component. It is a controller setting that acts as Following a start-up or after termination of defrost, the
a thermostat, “closing” (allowing defrost) when the DTS time will not begin counting down until the DTS reading
reading is below the set point and “opening” (terminating falls below set point (DTT closed). If the reading of DTS
or preventing defrost) when the DTS temperature read- rises above set point (DTT open) any time during the
ing is above set point. When the unit is operating in bulb timer count down, the interval is reset and the count-
mode (refer to paragraph 3.3.9), special settings may be down starts over.
applicable.
3.3.24 Defrost Related Settings
If the controller is programmed with the Lower DTT set-
ting option, the DTT set point may be configured to the If probe check (CnF31) is configured to SPECIAL, the
default of 25.6C (78F) or lowered to 18C (64F). unit will proceed to the next operation (snap freeze or
When a request for defrost is made through the manual terminate defrost). If CnF31 is configured to STAND-
defrost switch, communications or probe check the unit ARD, the unit will perform a probe check. The probe
will enter defrost if the DTS reading is at or below the check is a test that compares temperature sensor read-
DTT set point. Defrost will terminate when the DTS ings to determine if any sensors have failed.
reading rises above the DTT set point. When a request
for defrost is made with the defrost interval timer or by If probe check fails, the system will run for eight minutes
demand defrost, the defrost temperature set point must to validate. At the end of eight minutes, probe alarms will
be below 10C (50F). be set or cleared based on the current conditions.

T-362 3−10
When the return air temperature falls to 7C (45F), the 3.4.4 Compressor High Temperature Protection
controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10C or below. If it has The controller continuously monitors compressor dis-
not it indicates a failed DTS, a DTS failure alarm is charge pressure and temperature, and suction pres-
triggered and the defrost mode is operated by the return sure. If discharge pressure or temperature rises above
temperature sensor (RTS). the allowed limit or suction pressure falls below the al-
If CnF33 is configured to snap freeze, the controller will lowed limit, the compressor will be cycled off and on
sequence to this operation. The snap freeze consists of every 3 minutes. Condenser and evaporator fans will
running the compressor without the evaporator fans in continue to operate during the compressor off cycle.
operation for a period of 4 minutes at 100% capacity.
When the snap freeze is completed, defrost is termin- If high compressor dome temperature occurs, as meas-
ated. ured by the CPDS, the controller will allow additional re-
frigerant to be released into the system in order to
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of provide cooling to the evaporator coil and compressor
the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down dome. The controller is alerted to high compressor
and restored at power up. This option prevents short dome temperatures via the CPDS when ambient tem-
power interruptions from resetting an almost expired de- perature is greater than 43.3C, return air temperature
frost interval, and possibly delaying a needed defrost is less than -17.5C and the compressor discharge tem-
cycle. perature is greater than 117.7C.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed
to chose “OFF” as a defrost interval option. Dome temperature control logic will disengage when re-
turn air temperature and ambient temperature return to
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed allowed limits or when the compressor turns off.
to choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units
operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is de- 3.4.5 Compressor Low Pressure Protection
termined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evap-
orator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When
the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the If the suction pressure low limit is triggered, the DUV will
Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the de- energize to raise the suction pressure.
frost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost in-
terval is determined using the Automatic Defrost Inter- 3.4.6 Perishable Mode - System Pressure
val Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains Regulation
displayed in this function select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously In perishable mode, system pressures may need to be
selected Interval is used until the next defrost termina- regulated at ambient temperatures of 20C (68F) and
tion, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or the below. Once below this ambient temperature, the con-
next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previ- denser fan may cycle on and off based on limits imposed
ous value or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected for discharge pressure. For extremely cold ambient
value will be used immediately. temperatures, -18C (0F), heater cycling may occur
within normal system operation based on discharge
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set pressure limits.
to ’AUTO’ unless CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Cus-
tom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) con- 3.4.7 Condenser Fan Override
figuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be
set to “PuLS”.
When CnF17 (Discharge Temperature Sensor) is set to
“In” and CnF48 (Condenser Fan Switch Override) is set
3.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION to “On”, the condenser fan switch override logic is acti-
vated. If condenser cooling water pressure is sufficient
3.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation to open the water pressure switch (de-energizing the
condenser fan) when water flow or pressure conditions
Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut are not maintaining discharge temperature, the logic will
down the unit. energize the condenser fan as follows:
3.4.2 Failure Action
1. If the DUV is less than 80% open when the controller
Function code Cd29 may be operator set to select the calls for it to be100% open, the condenser fan is en-
action the controller will take upon a system failure. The ergized. When the DUV is 100% open, the fan will
factory default is full system shutdown. Refer to de-energize.
Table 3−5.
2. If DPT reading is invalid or out of range (AL65), the
3.4.3 Generator Protection condenser fan is energized and will remain ener-
Function codes Cd31(Stagger Start, Offset Time) and gized until system power is cycled.
Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control the
start up sequence of multiple units and operating current 3. If the system is running on condenser fan override
draw. The factory default allows on demand starting (no and the high pressure switch opens, the condenser
delay) of units and normal current draw. Refer to fan is energized and will remain energized until the
Table 3−5. system power is cycled.

3−11 T-362
3.5 QUEST − CCPC c. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the
alarm number sequentially in the queue.
Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a
method of temperature control used during steady-state d. The right display will show the actual alarm code.
perishable cooling that cycles the compressor on and off “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is
according to return air temperature. the alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive
alarm, see Table 3−6.
To be eligible for steady-state control the unit must first
complete a setpoint pulldown phase and a CCPC e. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list
pulldown phase: if any alarms are active.
During setpoint pulldown supply air temperature is f. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The
controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air alarm queue may then be cleared by pressing
setpoint. ENTER. The alarm list will clear and “‐‐‐‐‐” will be dis-
played.
During CCPC pulldown the supply air temperature is
lowered somewhat relative to the nominal setpoint. NOTE
Evaporator fans are forced to operate at high speed.
AL26 is active when none of the sensors are re-
Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same sponding. Check the connector at the back of the
lowered supply air temperature that was used during controller; if it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it,
CCPC pulldown. The compressor cycles on and off then run a Pre-trip test (P5) to clear AL26.
according to return air high and low limits. Depending on
the fan mode of operation selected, the evaporator fans
may be programmed to run at low speed some or all of 3.7 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSTICS
the time according to the control logic.
Pre-trip Diagnostics is an independent controller func-
tion that suspends normal refrigeration controller activi-
3.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS ties and provides preprogrammed test routines. The
test routine can be run in Auto Mode, which automatical-
Alarm display is an independent controller software ly performs a pre programmed sequence of tests, or
function. If an operating parameter is outside of ex- Manual Mode, which allows the operator to select and
pected range or a component does not return the cor- run any of the individual tests.
rect signals back to the controller, an alarm is gener-
ated. A listing of the alarms is provided in Table 3−6.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the re-
frigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The CAUTION
action taken when an error is detected always considers
the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm Pre-trip inspection should not be per-
that an error actually exists. formed with critical temperature cargoes in
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have the container.
time delays before and after to try to keep the compres-
sor on line. An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main
voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an in-
dication is given on the display, but the unit will continue
to run.
CAUTION
When an Alarm Occurs: When the Pre-trip key is pressed economy,
a. The red alarm light will illuminate for alarm code num- dehumidification and bulb mode will be de-
bers 15, 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27. activated. At the completion of the Pre-trip
test, economy, dehumidification and bulb
b. If a detectable problem exists, its alarm code will be
alternately displayed with the set point on the left mode must be reactivated.
display.
A Pre-trip test may be initiated by use of the keypad or
c. The user should scroll through the alarm list to deter- via communication, but when initiated by communica-
mine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must tion the controller will execute the entire battery of tests
be diagnosed and corrected before the Alarm List can (auto mode).
be cleared.
To Display Alarm Codes: At the end of a Pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts”
(pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing ENTER will
a. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM allow the user to see the results for each of the
LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display Mode, sub-tests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or
which displays any alarms archived in the alarm “FAIL” for each test run to completion.
queue.
b. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the se- A detailed description of the Pre-trip tests and test
quence in which they occurred. The user may scroll codes is provided in Table 3−7. Detailed operating in-
through the list by depressing an ARROW key. structions are provided in Paragraph 4.8.

T-362 3−12
3.8 DataCORDER  Supply Air Temperature
3.8.1 Description  Real Time Clock Battery (Internal) Replacement
Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is inte-  Real Time Clock Modification
grated into the controller and serves to eliminate the
temperature recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER  Trip Start
functions may be accessed by keypad selections and
viewed on the display module. The unit is also fitted with  ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interrogation
interrogation connections (see Figure 3−1) which may program)
be used with the Carrier Transicold DataReader to
download data. A personal computer with Carrier Trans-  Economy Mode Start and End
icold DataLINE software installed may also be used to  “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre-trip Start and End
download data and configure settings.
The DataCORDER consists of:  Bulb Mode Start

 Configuration Software  Bulb Mode Changes

 Operational Software  Bulb Mode End

 USDA Trip Comment
 Data Storage Memory
 Humidification Start and End
 Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
 USDA Probe Calibration
 Six Thermistor Inputs
 Fresh Air Vent Position
 Interrogation Connections
 Power Supply (battery pack) 3.8.2 DataCORDER Software
The DataCORDER performs the following functions: The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into
Operational Software, Configuration Software, and the
a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and Data Memory.
stores two years of data (based on one hour interval).
a. Operational Software
b. Records and displays alarms on the display module. The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs
c. Records results of Pre-trip testing. for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are
labeled Function Codes. Controller functions (see
d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control Table 3−8, page 3−43) which the operator may access
software generated data and events as follows: to examine the current input data or stored data. To
 Container ID Change access these codes, do the following:
1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT keys.
 Software Upgrades
2. Press an arrow key until the left window displays the
 Alarm Activity desired code number. The right window will display
the value of this item for five seconds before return-
 Battery Low (battery pack) ing to the normal display mode.
 Data Retrieval 3. If a longer display time is desired, press the ENTER
key to extend the display time to 30 seconds.
 Defrost Start and End
b. Configuration Software
 Dehumidification Start and End The configuration software controls the recording and
 Power Loss (with and without battery pack) alarm functions of the DataCORDER. Reprogramming
to the factory-installed configuration is achieved via a
 Power Up (with and without battery pack) configuration card. Changes to the unit DataCORDER
configuration may be made using the DataLINE
 Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container interrogation software.
(USDA Cold treatment and Cargo probe recording) A list of the configuration variables is provided in
 Return Air Temperature Table 3−2. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for
each variable setting are provided in the following
 Set Point Change paragraphs.

3−13 T-362
3.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) 8. Main voltage
Two modes of operation may be configured, the Stand- 9. Evaporator expansion valve percentage
ard Mode and the Generic Mode.
a. Standard Mode 10. Discrete outputs (Bit mapped - require special
handling if used)
In the standard mode, the user may configure the Data-
CORDER to record data using one of seven standard 11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped - require special
configurations. The seven standard configuration vari- handling if used)
ables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 3−3.
The inputs of the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA 12. Ambient sensor
#1, #2, #3 and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor in-
put will be generated by the DataCORDER. See 13. Evaporator temperature sensor
Figure 3−11. 14. Compressor discharge sensor
NOTE 15. Return temperature sensor (RTS)
The DataCORDER software uses the supply
16. Supply temperature sensor (STS)
and return recorder sensors (SRS, RRS). The
temperature control software uses the supply 17. Defrost temperature sensor
and return temperature sensors (STS, RTS).
18. Discharge pressure transducer
b. Generic Mode
19. Suction pressure transducer
The generic recording mode allows user selection of the
network data points to be recorded. The user may select 20. Condenser pressure transducer
up to a total of eight data points for recording. A list of the
data points available for recording follows. Changing the 21. Vent position sensor (VPS)
configuration to generic and selecting which data points
to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data 3.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03)
Retrieval Program. The user may select four different time intervals be-
1. Control mode tween data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals
in accordance with the real time clock. The clock is fac-
2. Control temperature tory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
3.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04)
3. Frequency
The user may configure the format in which the thermis-
4. Humidity tor readings are recorded. The short resolution is a 1
byte format and the long resolution is a 2 byte format.
5. Phase A current The short requires less memory and records tempera-
6. Phase B current ture with variable resolutions depending on temperature
range. The long records temperature in 0.01C
7. Phase C current (0.02F) steps for the entire range.

Table 3−2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables

CONFIGURATION NO. TITLE DEFAULT OPTION
dCF01 (Future Use) -- --
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2,5,6,9,54,64,94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15,30,60,120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A,b,C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere/Humidity Sampling Type A A,b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF08 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 2 A Auto, On, Off
dCF09 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 3 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off

T-362 3−14
 Raw Data Report for ABC1234567
May 31, 2007 to Jun 04, 2007
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On May 05, 2007
Extracted by DataLINE Rev 1.0.0

Controller Software: 5327

Controller Serial #: 04163552

Bill of Lading #: 1
Origin: Origin Date:
Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLINE Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
________________________________________________________________________________________
May 31, 2007
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04189552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution

Figure 3−11 Standard Configuration Download Report

3−15 T-362
Table 3−3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations 2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is
installed, the DataCORDER will power up for
communication when an interrogation cable is
Standard plugged into an interrogation receptacle.
Config. Description
2 sensors 3. External DC battery pack power: A 12 volt battery
(dCF02=2) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) pack may also be plugged into the back of the
interrogation cable, which is then plugged into an
5 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) interrogation port. No controller battery pack is
(dCF02=5) 3 USDA thermistor inputs required with this method.
6 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) 4. Real Time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is
(dCF02=6) 3 USDA thermistor inputs equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power
1 humidity input is not present, the DataCORDER will power up when
9 sensors the real time clock indicates that a data recording
(dCF02=9) Not Applicable should take place. When the DataCORDER is fin-
ished recording, it will power down.
6 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=54) 3 USDA thermistor inputs During DataCORDER power-up, while using bat-
1 cargo probe (thermistor input) tery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) voltage check on the battery. If the hardware check
7 sensors 3 USDA thermistor inputs passes, the controller will energize and perform a soft-
(dCF02=64) 1 humidity input ware battery voltage check before DataCORDER log-
1 cargo probe (thermistor input) ging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery
power-up will be disabled until the next AC power cycle.
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be pro-
10 sensors 3 USDA thermistor inputs hibited until that time.
(dCF02=94) 1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input) An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage
transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery
pack needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists
3.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, it indic-
Three types of data sampling are available: average, ates that the battery pack needs replacement.
snapshot and USDA. When configured to average, the av-
erage of readings taken every minute over the recording 3.8.9 Pre-trip Data Recording
period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a Pre-trip
sensor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When test (refer to paragraph 3.7) and the results of each test
USDA is configured, supply and return temperature read- included in Pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may
ings are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to
snapshot. Table 3−9 for a description of the data stored in the Da-
3.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) taCORDER for each corresponding Pre-trip test.
USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to 3.8.10 DataCORDER Communications
OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, the alarm for this Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be
probe is always disabled. accomplished by using the DataLINE, DataBANK Card,
or a communications interface module.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, the associated NOTE
alarm is always enabled.
A DataLINE or a communications interface
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a
group. This function is designed to assist users who module display of Communication Failed is
keep the DataCORDER configured for USDA record- caused by faulty data transfer between the
ing, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the DataCORDER and the data retrieval device.
probes are disconnected, no alarms are activated. As Common causes include:
soon as one of the probes is installed, all of the alarms
are enabled and the remaining probes that are not 1. Bad cable or connection between DataCORDER
installed will give active alarm indications. and data retrieval device.
3.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up 2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or
The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of mis−assigned.
four ways:
Configuration identification for the models covered
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered herein may be obtained on the Container Products
up when the unit is turned on via the Stop-Start Group Information Center by authorized Carrier Trans-
switch. icold Service Centers.

T-362 3−16
a. DataLINE b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment
The DataLINE software for a personal computer is sup-
plied on both floppy disks and CD. This software allows A special feature in DataLINE allows the user to enter a
interrogation, configuration variable assignment, USDA (or other) message in the header of a data report.
screen view of the data, hard copy report generation, The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only
cold treatment probe calibration and file management. one message will be recorded per day.
Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more
detailed explanation of the DataLINE interrogation soft- 3.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure
ware. The DataLINE manual may be found on the inter-
net at www.container.carrier.com. The following is a summary of the steps required to initi-
b. DataBANKE Card ate a USDA Cold Treatment:

The DataBANK™ card is a PCMCIA card that interfaces a. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the
with the controller through the programming slot and probes and performing the calibration function with
can download data at a fast rate. Files downloaded to the DataLINE. This calibration procedure determines
DataBANK card files are accessible through an Omni the probe offsets and stores them in the controller for
PC Card Drive. The files can then be viewed using the use in generating the cold treatment report. Refer to
DataLINE software. the Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for more details.
c. Communications Interface Module
b. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature
The communications interface module is a slave mod- or below.
ule, which allows communication with a master central
monitoring station. The module will respond to commu-
nication and return information over the main power line. c. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if not
already installed).
With a communications interface module installed, all
functions and selectable features that are accessible at d. Place the three probes. The probes are placed into
the unit may be performed at the master station. Re- the pulp of the product (at the locations defined in the
trieval of all DataCORDER reports may also be per- following table) as the product is loaded.
formed. Refer to the master system technical manual
for further information.
Place in pulp of the product located next
3.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment Sensor 1 to the return air intake.
Sustained cold temperature has been employed as an Place in pulp of the product five feet
effective postharvest method for the control of Mediter- from the end of the load for 40 foot con-
ranean and certain other tropical fruit flies. Exposing in- tainers, or three feet from the end of the
Sensor 2 load for 20 foot containers. This probe
fested fruit to temperatures of 2.2C (36F) or below for
specific periods results in the mortality of the various should be placed in a center carton at
stages of this group of insects. one-half the height of the load.
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with Place in pulp of product five feet from
this environmentally sound process, Carrier has inte- the end of the load for 40 foot containers
grated Cold Treatment capability into its microprocessor or three feet from the end of the load for
Sensor 3 20 foot containers. This probe should be
system. These units have the ability to maintain supply
air temperature within one quarter degree Celsius of set placed in a carton at a side wall at
point and record minute changes in product tempera- one-half the height of the load.
ture within the DataCORDER memory, thus meeting
USDA criteria. Information on USDA is provided in the
following sub-paragraphs. e. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal
computer and perform the configuration as follows,
a. USDA Recording using the DataLINE software:
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treat-
ment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires three 1. Enter ISO header information.
remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed
locations in the cargo. Provision is made to connect 2. Enter a trip comment if desired.
these probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles lo-
cated at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or five re- 3. Configure the DataCORDER for five probes (s, r, P1,
ceptacles are provided. The four 3-pin receptacles are P2, P3) (dcf02=5).
for the probes. The 5-pin receptacle is the rear connec-
tion for the Interrogator. The probe receptacles are
sized to accept plugs with tricam coupling locking de- 4. Configure the logging interval for one hour.
vices. A label on the back panel of the unit shows which
receptacle is used for each probe. 5. Set the sensor configuration to “USDA.”
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply
and return air temperatures. The cold treatment report 6. Configure for two byte memory storage format
displays USDA #1, #2, #3 and the supply and return air (dcf04=LONG).
temperatures. Cold treatment recording is backed up by
a battery so recording can continue if AC power is lost. 7. Perform a “trip start.”

3−17 T-362
3.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms 4. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left
display and “‐‐‐‐‐” on the right display when there are
The alarm display is an independent DataCORDER
no alarms in the list.
function. If an operating parameter is outside of the ex-
pected range or a component does not return the cor- 5. Upon clearing of the alarm queue, the alarm light will
rect values to the DataCORDER, an alarm is generated. be turned off.
The DataCORDER contains a buffer of up to eight
alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is pro- 3.8.14 ISO Trip Header
vided in Table 3−10, page 3−45. Refer to paragraph
3.8.7 for configuration information. DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view/
modify current settings of the ISO trip header through
To display alarm codes: the ISO Trip Header screen.
a. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALT.
MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses the Data- The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user
clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip Func-
CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays
any alarms stored in the alarm queue. tions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
b. To scroll to the end of the alarm list, press the UP AR- F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manu-
ROW. Depressing the DOWN ARROW key will scroll ally triggering the refresh operation. Before sending
the list backward. modified parameter values, the user must ensure that a
successful connection is established with the controller.
c. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms
number in the queue. The right display will show If the connection is established with the DataCORDER,
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Da-
number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive taCORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connec-
d. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list tion is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields
on the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time dur-
if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the
alarms in the list are inactive. ing the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the con-
nection is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to
e. If no alarms are active, the alarm queue may be the status of the connection.
cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORD-
ER alarm queue Full alarm (AL91), which does not After modifying the values and ensuring a successful
have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list. To connection has been made with the DataCORDER,
clear the alarm list: click on the “Send” button to send the modified parame-
ter values.
1. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys.
The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is
2. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW key until “CLEAr” is
displayed. 128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or
close the utility without sending the changes made on
3. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with
“‐‐‐‐‐” will be displayed. a message.

T-362 3−18
3.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES

Table 3−4 Controller Configuration Variables

CONFIGURATION
TITLE DEFAULT OPTION
NUMBER
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) SS (Single)
CnF03 Control Temperature Sensors FOUr duAL
CnF04 Enable Dehumidification On OFF
CnF08 Evaporator Motor Type 1Ph 3Ph
CnF09 Refrigerant Type r134a r744
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF OFF
CnF15 Enable Discharge Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF16 Enable DataCORDER On (Yes) (Not Allowed)
CnF17 Enable Discharge Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF18 Heater Type Old (Low Watt) nEW (High Watt)
CnF20 Enable Suction Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF22 Economy Mode OFF Std, Full
CnF23 Enable Defrost Interval Save noSAv SAv
CnF24 Enable Long Pre-trip Test Series Auto Auto2, Auto 3
CnF25 Enable Pre-trip Data Recording rSLtS dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Temperature Set to -10C Set to -5C
CnF27 Enable Suction Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode NOr bULb
CnF31 Probe Check SPEC Std
CnF32 Enable Single Evaporator Fan Option 2EF0 (Not Allowed)
CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze OFF SnAP
CnF34 Temperature Unit Display bOth F
CnF37 Electronic Chart Probe rEtUR SUPPL, bOth
CnF41 Enable Low DTT Setting Out In
CnF44 Autoslide Enable Out LO, UP
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled Out In
CnF46 Quench/liquid Injection Valve Type nO=0=no nC=1=nc
CnF47 Vent Position OFF UP, LOW, CUStOM
CnF49 OEM Reset Option OFF 0-off,1-std, 2-spec,3-cust
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface 0-out 1-in
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0-out 1-in
CnF52 Oil Return Algorithm 0-out 1-in
CnF53 Water Cool Oil Return Logic 0-out 1-in
CnF55 TXV Boost Relay 0-out 1-in
CnF56 TXV Boost Circuit 0-out 1-in
CnF57 PWM Compressor Control 0-out 1-in
CnF59 Electronic Evaporator Expansion Valve 0-none 1-EC, 2-KE, 3- NA
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF63 CCPC Pre-trip/Tripstart Default State 0-on 1-off
CnF64 Enable Fan Pulsing Logic 0-in 1-out
CnF66 High Speed Evaporator Fan Option 0-off 1-on
CnF67 Air Heaters 0-out 1-in
CnF68 Enable Default Pulsing Temperature 0-out 1-in
Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.

3−19 T-362
3.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES
Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 1 of 8)
Code
No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Note: If the function is not applicable, the display will read “‐‐‐‐‐”
Display Only Functions − Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Display Only Functions
Digital Unloader Displays the DUV percent closed. The right display reads 100% when the valve is
Cd01 Valve Closed (%) fully closed. The valve will usually be at 10% on start up of the unit except in very
high ambient temperatures.

Compressor Motor The current sensor measures current draw in lines L1 & L2 by all of the high volt-
Cd03 Current age components. It also measures current draw in compressor motor leg T3. The
compressor leg T3 current is displayed.
Cd04 Line Current, The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg is calcu-
Phase A lated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for control and
diagnostic purposes. For control processing, the highest of the Phase A and B cur-
Cd05 Line Current, rent values is used for current limiting purposes. For diagnostic processing, the cur-
Phase B rent draws are used to monitor component energization. Whenever a heater or a mo-
tor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/reduction for that activity is mea-
Cd06 Line Current, sured. The current draw is then tested to determine if it falls within the expected range
Phase C of values for the component. Failure of this test will result in a Pre-trip failure or a con-
trol alarm indication.
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Main Power The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency dis-
Cd08 Frequency played will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm code AL21).
Ambient
Cd09 Temperature The ambient sensor reading is displayed.
Evaporator Temper-
Cd10 ature Sensor Evaporator temperature sensor reading is shown on the right display.
Compressor Dis- Compressor discharge temperature sensor reading, using compressor dome tem-
Cd11 charge Temperature perature, is displayed.

Compressor Suction Reading for evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) is shown on the left display;
Cd12 Pressure Press ENTER at Cd12 to show reading for compressor suction port pressure on
right display.
Compressor Dis-
Cd14 charge Pressure Compressor discharges pressure transducer reading is displayed.
Digital Unloader
Cd15 Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
This code displays the compressor motor hours. User can view unit run time by
pressing the ENTER key while in Cd16. Total hours are recorded in increments of
Compressor Motor 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
Cd16 Hour Meter/Unit Run
Time Hour Meter The Compressor Motor Hour Meter display can be reset to 0 by pressing and
holding the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The Unit Run Time Hour Meter cannot be
reset.
Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity, as
Cd17 Relative Humidity % a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision # The software revision number is displayed.
This code checks the Controller/DataCORDER battery pack. While the test is run-
ning, “btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the result. “PASS” will be dis-
played for battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts. “FAIL” will be displayed for battery
Cd19 Battery Check voltages between 4.5 and 7.0 volts, and “‐‐‐‐‐” will be displayed for battery voltages
less than 4.5 volts. After the result is displayed for four seconds, “btest” will again be
displayed, and the user may continue to scroll through the various codes.
This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is con-
figured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-551-100, the display will show “51100”). To
display controller configuration database information, press ENTER. Values in
Cd20 Config/Model # “CFYYMMDD” format are displayed if the controller was configured with a config-
uration card or with a valid OEM serial port configuration update; YYMMDD rep-
resents the publication date of the model configuration database.

T-362 3−20
 Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 2 of 8)
Cd21 Capacity Mode The mode of operation is displayed (Unloaded - Standard - Economized).
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (OFF, On).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan Displays the current evaporator fan state (OFF, LOW, HIGH).
Compressor Run This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths of
Cd25 Time Remaining an hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor running
Until Defrost time.
Defrost Temperature
Cd26 Sensor Reading Defrost temperature sensor reading is displayed.

Configurable Functions − Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value of
these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
This is the desired period of time between defrost cycles. Factory default is 3 hours.
Refer to Section 3.3.23 for information on Defrost Interval.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose “OFF” as a de-
frost interval option.
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a
defrost interval option. For units operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval
is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or
Defrost Interval less than the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is
Cd27 (Hours or Automatic) set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is determined using the Automatic
Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in
this function select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used
until the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or
the next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value or the new
value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ’AUTO’ unless CnF49
(OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) con-
figuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to “PuLS”.
This code determines the temperature units (C or F) that will be used for all
Temperature Units temperature displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function code Cd28
Cd28 (Degrees C or and pushing the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units. This
Degrees F) function code will display “‐‐‐‐‐“ if CnF34 is set to F.
If all of the control sensors are out of range (alarm code AL26) or there is a probe
circuit calibration failure (alarm code AL27), the unit will enter the shutdown state
defined by this setting. The user selects one of four possible actions as follows:
Failure Action A - Full Cooling (Compressor is on, economized operation.)
Cd29 (Mode)
b - Partial Cooling (Compressor is on, standard operation.)
C - Evaporator Fan Only (Evaporator fans on high speed, not applicable with frozen
set points.)
d - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default (Shut down every component in the unit.)
The in-range tolerance will determine the temperature band around the set point
which will be designated as in-range.
For normal temperature control, control temperature is considered in range if it is
within setpoint in-range Tolerance. There are four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5C (+/-0.9F)
2 = +/- 1.0C (+/-1.8F)
3 = +/- 1.5C (+/-2.7F)
4 = +/- 2.0C (+/-3.6F) - Factory Default
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance
If the control temperature is in-range, the green IN-RANGE light will be illumi-
nated.
In-range tolerance shall be set to +/- 2.0C upon activation of dehumidification or
bulb mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, in-range tolerance is not considered.
“-----“ will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb mode is enabled or
when CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
“-----“ will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.

3−21 T-362
 Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 3 of 8)
The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at
Stagger Start Offset start-up, thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all
Cd31 Time (Seconds) units are powered up together. The eight possible offset values are 0 (Factory De-
fault), 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds.
The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time. Lim-
iting the unit’s current reduces the load on the main power supply. When desirable,
Current Limit
Cd32 (Amperes) the limit can be lowered. Note, however, that capacity is also reduced. The five values
for 460 VAC operation are: 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 amperes. The factory default setting
is 21 amperes.
This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify or humidify. There
are configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification/humidification
capabilities are installed. In the test mode, the setpoint will be temporarily set to 1%,
allowing the test of dehumidification. After 5 minutes, the normal setpoint is restored.
If unit is configured for HUMIDIFICATION MODE then selection of a setpoint greater
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint than 75% will activate humidification, and a setpoint less than or equal to 75% will
activate dehumidification. If the unit is configured for dehumidification only, then the
entire setpoint range will apply to dehumidification. If Pretrip is initiated, this value will
be set to “OFF” automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)
Economy Mode The current state of the economy mode option, “-----”, On, or Off. CnF22 determ-
Cd34 (On-Off) ines whether economy mode offered. Economy mode is a user selectable mode
of operation provided for power saving purposes.
The current state of the bulb mode option, “-----”, nOr, or bULb.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification control (Cd33). If dehumidification
(CnF04) is set to “Off,” Cd35 will display “Nor” and the user will be unable to
Cd35 Bulb Mode change it. CnF28 determines whether the bulb mode selection is offered.
After a dehumidification set point has been selected and entered for code Cd33,
the user may then change Cd35 to “bulb.” After Bulb Mode has been selected
and entered, the user may then utilize function codes Cd36 and Cd37 to make
the desired changes.
This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb Dehumidification
and Humidification mode option.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
This code is enabled only if in the dehumidification mode (Cd33) and bulb mode
(Cd35) has been set to “bulb.” If these conditions are not met, “alt” will be dis-
Evaporator Fan played (indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and the dis-
Cd36 Speed Select play cannot be changed.
If a dehumidification set point has been selected along with bulb mode then “alt”
may be selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low speed evaporator fan only, or
“Hi” for high speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than “alt” has been selected and bulb mode is deactivated in any
manner, then selection reverts back to “alt.”
This is the variable defrost termination thermostat setting to be used with the op-
Variable DTT Setting tional bulb mode functionality. This item is only displayed if the bulb mode option
Cd37 (Bulb Mode) is configured on.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)
Display Only Functions − Cd38 through Cd40 are display only functions.
Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for units con-
Secondary Supply figured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd38 will
Cd38 Temperature Sensor display “‐‐‐‐‐.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd38 will display the
supply recorder sensor reading.
Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for units con-
Secondary Return figured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd39 will
Cd39 Temperature Sensor display “‐‐‐‐‐.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd39 will display the
return recorder sensor reading.

T-362 3−22
 Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 4 of 8)
If a valid container id exists, the default display for Cd40 will be “cd40_XXXXX”
where “XXXXX” is the 5th character through the 9th character of the container id.
Pressing the Enter key on Cd40 will display “id_YYYYYYY” where “YYYYYYY” is
the 5th character to the 11th character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default display will
have Cd40 on the left display and the right display will alternate between “_nEEd”
Container and “___id”. Pressing the enter key while on Cd40 in the state will prompt the Set
Cd40 Identification Id Interface.
Number
On start up if the container id is not valid, Cd40 will be brought up on the display
for the first minute of power up. This can be left by either entering a container id
or leaving the code select normally.
Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification num-
ber. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the numeric portion of the
number will display.
SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting, and allows manual
positioning of the economizer solenoid valve, electronic expansion valve, and di-
Cd41 Valve Override gital unloader valve. Provides readings such as: Percent Capacity, EEV, Capacity
Mode, LIV and DUV. Refer to paragraph 6.20 for operating instructions.
Configurable Functions − Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function to
meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows the opening and closing
of a mechanical air vent door via a stepper motor. These selection modes are as
follows:
OFF - Air makeup vent will remain closed.
USER - Allows for manual selection of the setting.
DELAY -The opening of the door is based on selected time, return temperature
and flow rate (percent opened).
Cd43 eAutoFresh Mode
gASLM - The opening is based percent open and CO2 and O2 selectable limits
(LM). This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 sensor.
TEST / CAL (CO2 sensor option units only) - The door will fully open and close
to allow the user to inspect its operation. If CAL is selected, the controller will
zero calibrate the CO2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured with AutoFresh, the Cd43 will display “----”
Refer to section 4.4.3 for description of operational parameters.
Display Only Function − Cd44 is a display only function.
Code Cd44 displays the eAutoFresh CO2 and O2 values (CO2 and O2) and CO2
and O2 limits (CO2 LIM and O2 LIM), respectively.
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for eAutofresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 sensor is not detected, and a sensor is
not expected (didn’t have one previously).
eAutoFresh Values /
Cd44 CO Sensor Status This function code will display “ChECK” if a CO2 sensor has not been auto-detec-
2
ted at the most recent power-up and was detected at a previous power-up. If
“ChECK” is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, “SEnSr” is displayed with
the choices of “YES” and “no”:
“YES” – sensor should be remembered as detected (present)
“no” – sensor should not be remembered as being detected (not present)
Configurable Functions − Cd45 through Cd48 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value of
these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in units of 5
Vent Position Sensor CMH (units displayed as “CM”) or CFM (units displayed as “CF”) depending on
Cd45 (VPS) Position the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the press-
ing of the deg C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sensor unless
AL50 is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time out and return to the
normal display mode.

3−23 T-362
 Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 5 of 8)
Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent Position
Sensor or displayed by “USER/FLO” under Cd43 if configured for Autoslide.
CF= Cubic Feet per Minute
Cd46 Airflow Display Units
CM=Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth=Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or
the pressing of the degree C/F key.
Used when Economy Mode (CnF22) is set to 3−cust. Display will show “----” when
the unit is not configured for Economy Mode.
When the unit has a perishable setpoint and Economy Mode is active, at the start
Variable Economy
Cd47 Temperature Setting of each cooling or heating cycle, high speed evaporator fans will run for 3
minutes. After three minutes, the evaporator fans will be switched to low speed
any time that the supply temperature is within +/− 0.25C of the setpoint and the
return temperature is less than or equal to the supply temperature + the user se-
lected Cd47 (values are 0.5 C − 4.0 C, default is 3.0 C).
Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo mode,
dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting). Pressing
ENTER key in any parameter selection menu commits to selection of the
currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next
parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a
blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection
activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd48
display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pretrip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
- Dehumidification control setpoint goes to 0% RH internally but will then initialize to
Dehumidification / 95% RH when dehumidification-mode leaves OFF.
Cd48 Bulb Cargo Mode - Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compressor Control
Parameter Selection (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for units with PWM
Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
- DTT setting goes to 25.6C or 18.0C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0C if it
had been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to 25.6C or
18.0C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
- Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH evaporator
speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
- Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH evaporator
speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
- Whenever dehumidification control set point is set below 60% RH, the evaporator
fan speed is set to LO, the user has the ability to set the evaporator fan speed to Hi
via the keypad.
- Whenever dehumidification control set point is set equal to or above 60% RH, the
evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the ability to set the evaporator fan
speed to LO via the keypad.

T-362 3−24
 Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 6 of 8)

Display Only Function − Cd49 is a display only function.

Displays the number of days since last successful pretrip sequence.

Press ENTER to view the number of days since the last successful pretrip for
Days Since Last
Cd49 Successful Pre-trip Auto1, Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press CODE SELECT to step back through the list and ultimately to exit the
Cd49 display.

Configurable Functions − Cd50 through Cd53 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value of
these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.

”OFF” = disabled.
”On” = enabled.
”SEtPt” = suspended by setpoint too low.
”CAHUM” = suspended by CA or humidity control.
”ACt” = suspended by ACT active.
”FAIL” = all return temperature probe failure for CCPC.
Cd50 CCPC Disabled ”PrtrP” = pretrip active.
”C LIM” = suspended by cool limit logic.
”PULL” = pulldown active.
“ALArM ” = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press enter, arrow keys, and then enter to select ”OFF” or ”On”.
If ”On” is selected, CCPC operation may be suspended as indicated by one of the
suspension codes listed above. If CCPC is not ”OFF” and is not suspended, ”On”
will be displayed.

ACT-mode:
Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value “On” “OFF” or “----“Display /Select: default “OFF“
“trEAt” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “0.0C“
“DAyS” value “0 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0“
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex ’1 2 _ 4’ ’1 _ 3 _’ Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value C / F on 0.1 increments Display/Select: default “10.0C “
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr), de-
fault “0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting).
Pressing ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus commits to selec-
Automatic Cold tion of the currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into
Cd51 Treatment the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate
Parameter Selection between a blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection
activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd51 dis-
play mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any previ-
ously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration op-
tions and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered if
“Act” is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto Pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ACT mode goes to OFF.

3−25 T-362
 Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 7 of 8)
ASC-mode:
Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default “OFF“
“nSC” value “1 - 6“ (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default
“10.0C“
“DAY (n-1)” value “1 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “1“
“SP (n)” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “10.0C
Initially Cd53 will display current count down timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus, (mode, act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting). Pressing
ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus selects the currently dis-
Automatic Set point played parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next parameter
Cd53 Change Mode selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display
Parameter Selection and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection
activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd53 dis-
play mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any previ-
ously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration op-
tions and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is re-entered if
“ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including reaching the last setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ASC off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to OFF.
Display Only Functions − Cd54 through Cd58 are display only functions.
Suction Port
Superheat / Reading for evaporator superheat (suction temperature minus suction saturation
Cd54 Electronic temperature as calculated from suction pressure) is shown on the right display.
Expansion Valve Press ENTER at Cd54 to show reading for EEV position (in %) on left display.
Status
Cd55 will display discharge superheat (discharge temperature minus discharge
saturation temperature as calculated from discharge pressure) values in C /F as
Discharge Super-
Cd55 heat calculated by the discharge temperature minus the discharge saturation tempera-
ture as calculated from discharge pressure. “-----” will be displayed if selection is
not valid.
Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are closed or if
these options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when the WPS or CFS switch
contacts are open. When the WPS/CFS Override Logic is “TRUE”, the right dis-
play will flash on all units.
NOTE:
1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function only applies to
Water Pressure units that have the ability to detect the state of a WPS/CFS. This function should
Switch / Condenser not be relied upon to display the condition of the switch on units that don’t have a
Cd58 Fan Switch State or WPS/CFS switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
Override Logic State 2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is TRUE on all units.
This is always the case, whether the unit has a WPS or CFS installed or not.
3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the condenser fan is limited.
It is not possible for this logic to control the fan on units that have the WPS or CFS
wired in series with the fan contactor. Units wired in this configuration can indicate
that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by flashing the right display, however,
the wiring will not allow for control of the condenser fan.

T-362 3−26
 Table 3−5 Controller Function Codes (Sheet 8 of 8)
Configurable Functions − Cd59 through Cd61 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value of
these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd59 allows operation of the pump down logic control. The display will flash
between “STArT PdN” and “PrESS EnTEr”.
Upon entering Cd59 the operator will be required to acknowledge that they want
to initiate the pump down control. The display will flash between “STArT P dN”
and “PrESS EnTEr”. Once the decision to continue is confirmed pump down lo-
gic will begin, and will take complete control of the unit until pump down either
succeeds or fails. This operation can not be halted once it begins without power
cycling the unit.
After pump down logic has been initiated, the operator will be notified to close the
Cd59 Pump Down Logic Liquid Line Valve, the display will flash between “CLOSE LLV” and “PrESS
EnTEr”. Once complete the display will read “P dN” to the left, and the current
suction pressure to the right.
If the automatic pump down logic succeeds within 20 minutes, the unit will turn it-
self off, and the display will notify the operator that pump down is complete by
flashing between “P dN DOnE” and “SHUT OFF”. The operator must then shut
off the unit.
If the automatic pump down logic does not complete within 20 minutes, the unit
will drop out of Cd59 and return to its previous control condition.
Cd60 contains a selectable temperature range used to determine the engage-
ment point of the Evaporator Fan Pulsing logic. Default setting is -18.1C. The
Evaporator Fan
user may change the temperature by pressing enter, then scrolling to the desired
Cd60 Pulsing Temperature temperature using either arrow key. Press Enter to accept the change. The tem-
Setting
perature setting will be retained until either a Pretrip or Trip Start is initiated at
which time the temperature will set to the default setting.
Cd61 is used to force evaporator fan speed to high while temperature control is
being performed in the perishable setpoint range. When set to “On”, evaporator
fans operate in high speed regardless of any other active option that can control
High Speed evaporator fan speed.
Cd61 Evaporator Fan Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is retained at its
Setting state prior to the power cycle. If “On”, this function select code will be set to
“OFF” when any trip start occurs or any pretrip test is initiated.
“-----” will be displayed if setpoint is in frozen range or if CnF66 is configured OFF.

3−27 T-362
 Start
Troubleshooting

Unit does No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER

self test? Supply
Section 4.2

Yes

Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER
fans start? Supply Section 4.2

Yes

Correct No Install Latest Refer to CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

software Software
version? Revision Section 3.2

Yes

Unit Load correct

configured No Refer to Configuration Software (Variables)
unit Section 3.2.1
correctly? configuration

Yes

See alarm
Active Yes details & Refer to Controller Alarm Indications
Alarms? repair Table 3−6

No

Pass No Refer to Pre-trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 3.7

Yes

Operating No Correct Refer to REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

pressures Refrigerant SERVICE Section 6.3
normal? issue

Yes

Unit OK

Figure 3−12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence

T-362 3−28
3.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS
Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 1 of 8)
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL03 Superheat has Electronic Check the operation of the Replace EEV if
Loss of remained below Expansion Valve EEV using Cd41. defective.
Superheat 1.66C (3F) degrees (EEV)
Control for five minutes Evaporator Verify accuracy of Replace ETS or ETS1 if
continuously while Temperature temperature sensors, refer defective.
compressor running. Sensor(s) ETS & to Sensor Checkout
Compressor drawing ETS1. Procedure Section 6.23.
more than 2.0 amps,
compressor pressure Evaporator Fans Confirm fans operating Replace fan(s) if
ratio is greater than properly. defective, refer to
1.8, and Electronic EVAPORATOR FAN
Expansion Valve MOTOR ASSEMBLY
(EEV) is at 0% open. Section 6.14.
AL05 Controller has Keypad Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Manual detected continuous correct problem,
Defrost Manual Defrost monitor the unit.
Switch Failure Switch activity for five If the alarm reappears
minutes or more. after 5 minutes replace
the keypad.
AL06 Controller has Keypad or Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Keypad or detected one of the Harness correct problem,
Keypad keypad keys is monitor the unit.
Harness Fail continuously activity. If the alarm reappears
replace the keypad and
harness.
AL07 The VPS is reading Vent Position Manually reposition vent If unable to obtain zero
Fresh Air Vent greater than 0 CMH Sensor (VPS) and confirm using Cd45. reading, replace
Open with while unit is in frozen Refer to VENT POSITION defective VPS.
Frozen Set mode. SENSOR SERVICE
Point Section 6.24.
AL08 Controller detects Discharge Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if
High discharge pressure to Pressure pressure readings, refer to defective.
Compressor suction pressure ratio Transducer (DPT) MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Pressure is too high. Section 6.2.
Ratio The controller will
attempt to correct the
situation by restarting
the compressor.
AL10 Alarm 10 is triggered This is a display Refer to eAutoFresh The alarm is triggered
CO2 Sensor when the CO2 sensor alarm and has no manual. off when voltage is
Failure voltage is operating associated failure within operating range.
outside of the 0.9 v to action.
4.7 v range, or if the
sensor is out of range.
AL14 Controller is unable to N/A Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Phase determine the correct correct problem,
Sequence phase relationship. monitor the unit.
Detect Fault Wiring Check unit wiring. Correct wiring.
Confirm pressure readings
during start-up; suction
pressure should decrease
and discharge pressure
should increase.
Current Sensor Check Cd41, right most Replace current sensor
digit: if defective.
If display is 3 or 4 check
compressor / sensor wiring.
If display is 5 the current
sensor is defective.

3−29 T-362
 Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 2 of 8)

Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions

AL16 Compressor current Current Sensor Compare Cd3 to actual Replace current sensor
Compressor draw is over the measured current at wire if defective.
Current High calculated maximum T1-T2 or T3 going to the
for 10 minutes. compressor contactor. If
there is a difference,
determine whether this is
caused by current sensor
or amp clamp tool.
Amperage is Confirm supply voltage/fre- Correct power supply.
indeed too high. quency is within specifica-
tion and balanced accord-
ing to Electrical Data Sec-
tion 2.3.
Operating Make sure system Check air flow of
Conditions pressures are relevant to condenser.
operating conditions. Check Refrigerant
charge, refer to
REFRIGERATION
SYSTEM SERVICE
Section 6.3
Monitor Unit Alarm is display only the If alarm remains active
alarm may clear itself or is repetitive replace
during operation compressor at next
available opportunity,
refer to COMPRESSOR
Service Section 6.8.
AL17 Compressor has N/A Controller will attempt Resume normal
Compressor attempted to start in restart every 20 minutes operation.
Pressure both directions and and deactivate the alarm if
Delta Fault fails to generate successful.
sufficient pressure Discharge Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if
differential between Pressure pressure readings, refer to defective.
SPT and DPT. Transducer (DPT) MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 6.2.
Suction Pressure Confirm accurate SPT Replace SPT if
Transducer (SPT) pressure readings, refer to defective.
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 6.2.
Monitor unit Alarm is display only the If alarm remains active
alarm may clear itself or is repetitive replace
during operation. compressor at next
available opportunity.

T-362 3−30
 Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 3 of 8)

Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions

AL18 Discharge pressure is Restrictions in the Ensure Liquid Line Service Open Liquid Line Ser-
Discharge over the maximum for refrigeration Valve is fully open. vice Valve as needed.
Pressure High 10 minutes within the system.
last hour. Filter Drier Check the filter drier, if it is Replace the filter drier if
iced up or very cold it needed, refer to FILTER
indicates that the filter drier DRIER Service Section
needs replacement. 6.12.
Condenser Fan Check Condenser Fan for Correct as required.
proper operation.
Discharge Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if
Pressure pressure readings, refer to defective.
Transducer (DPT) MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 6.2.
Non-condens- With the unit off allow Correct as required,
ables in the refri- system to stabilize to refer to Refrigerant
geration system. ambient temperature. Charge Section 6.7.1.
Check system pressure
against PT Chart for 134a,
refer to Table 6−4.
Refrigerant Check refrigerant level. Correct as required,
refer to Refrigerant
Charge Section 6.7.1.
AL19 Discharge temperat- Restrictions in the Ensure the Discharge Ser- Open the Discharge Ser-
Discharge ure exceeds 135C refrigeration vice Valve is fully open. vice Valve as needed.
Temperature (275F) for 10 minutes system. Check the unit for air flow Clean or remove any
High within the last hour. restrictions. debris from coils.
Non-condens- With the unit off allow Correct as required,
ables in the refri- system to stabilize to refer to Refrigerant
geration system. ambient temperature. Charge Section 6.7.1.
Check system pressure
against PT Chart for 134a,
refer to Table 6−4.
Additional Alarms Check compressor If the alarm persists, it
such as AL16, operation. may indicate a failing
AL24. compressor, replace the
compressor, refer to
COMPRESSOR Ser-
vice Section 6.8.
AL20 Control power fuse Check F3A, if the Check PA, PB, CH coils for Replace the defective
Control (F3A or F3B) is open. fuse is open: short to ground, if short is coil.
Contactor found: Replace the fuse.
Fuse (F3) Check F3B, if the Check ESV coil resistance Replace the defective
fuse is open: at TP7 to TP9, if short to coil.
ground, or if resistance is Replace the fuse.
less than 4 ohms, coil is
defective.
Check CF, ES, EF, HR coils
for short to ground, if short
is found, coil is defective.
Check Voltage at If voltage is present, it Refer to Controller
QC1: indicates a defective Service Section 6.22.
microprocessor.

3−31 T-362
 Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 4 of 8)

Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions

AL21 One of the 18 VAC System Sensors Check system sensors for Replace defective
Control Circuit controller fuses short to ground. sensor(s)
Fuse (F1/F2) (F1/F2) is open. Refer Wiring Check wiring for short to Repair as needed.
to Cd08. ground.
Controller Controller may have an Replace controller, refer
internal short. to Controller Service
Section 6.22.
AL22 Evaporator motor Evaporator Motor Shut down unit, disconnect Replace defective
Evaporator IP internal protector (IP) power, & check Evaporator evaporator fan motor,
is open. Motor IP at plug connection refer to EVAPORATOR
pins 4 & 6. FAN MOTOR Service
Section 6.14.
AL23 Controller fails to Incoming Power Check incoming power Correct power source as
Loss of Phase detect current draw. source. required.
B
AL24 Compressor internal Compressor Shut down unit disconnect Monitor unit, if alarm
Compressor protector (IP) is open. power, & check resistance remains active or is
IP of compressor windings at repetitive replace the
contactor T1-T2, T2-T3. compressor at the next
available opportunity,
refer to COMPRESSOR
Service Section 6.8.
AL25 Condenser fan motor Insufficient Air Shut down unit and check Remove obstructions.
Condenser IP internal protector (IP) Flow condenser fan for obstruc-
is open. tions.
Condenser Fan Shut down unit, disconnect Replace defective
Motor power, & check Condenser condenser fan motor,
Fan Motor IP at plug con- refer to Condenser Fan
nection pins 1 & 2. Motor Assembly
Service Section 6.11.
AL26 Sensors out of range. All sensors. Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
All Sensors detected as out of action is required.
Failure: range If P5 fails, replace the
Supply/Return defective sensor as
Probes determined by P5, refer
to TEMPERATURE
SENSOR Service
Section 6.23.
AL27 Controller AD Controller Power cycle the unit. If the Replace defective
Analog to converter faulty. alarm persists, it indicates microprocessor, refer to
Digital a defective Controller Service
Accuracy microprocessor. Section 6.22.
Failure

T-362 3−32
 Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 5 of 8)

Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions

AL28 Suction pressure too N/A Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Low Suction low for normal correct problem, monitor
Pressure operation. the unit.
Suction Pressure Confirm accurate SPT Replace SPT if
Transducer (SPT) pressure readings, refer to defective.
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 6.2.
Discharge Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if
Pressure pressure readings, refer to defective.
Transducer (DPT) MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 6.2.
AL29 Alarm 29 is triggered Alarm LED will be Refer to eAutoFresh The alarm is triggered off
if CO2 or O2 level is activated and user manual. when atmospheric con-
AutoFresh
Failure outside of the limit intervention is re- ditions are within limit
range and the vent quired. settings.
position is at 100% for
longer than 90
minutes.
AL50 VPS Sensor out of Vent Position Make sure VPS is secure. Manually tighten panel.
Air Vent range. Sensor (VPS) If the alarm persists, Replace VPS.
Position replace the sensor or the
Sensor (VPS) assembly.
AL51 Controller Memory Controller Pressing the ENTER key If action is successful (all
EEPROM Failure when “CLEAr” is displayed alarms are inactive),
Failure will result in an attempt to alarm 51 will be reset.
clear the alarm.
Power cycle the unit. If the Replace defective
alarm persists, it indicates controller, refer to
defective controller Controller Service
memory. Section 6.22
AL52 Alarm list queue is full. Active Alarms Repair any alarms in the Clear alarms, refer to
EEPROM queue that are active. CONTROLLER
Alarm List Full Indicated by “AA”. ALARMS Section 3.6.
AL53 Battery voltage low Battery If this alarm occurs on start To clear the alarm press
Battery Pack up, allow a unit fitted with ENTER and ALT simul-
Failure rechargeable batteries to taneously at the startup
operate for up to 24 hours of Cd19 (Battery Check).
to charge rechargeable
batteries sufficiently. Once If alarm persists, replace
fully charged, the alarm will the battery pack, refer to
deactivate. Section 6.22.5 Battery
Replacement.
AL54 Invalid Supply Supply Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Primary Temperature Sensor Temperature action is required.
Supply Sensor (STS) reading. Sensor (STS) If P5 fails, replace the
(STS) defective sensor as
determined by P5, refer
to TEMPERATURE
SENSOR Service
Section 6.23.

3−33 T-362
 Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 6 of 8)

Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions

AL56 Invalid Return Return Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Primary Temperature Sensor Temperature action is required.
Return Sensor (RTS) reading. Sensor (RTS) If P5 fails, replace the
(RTS) defective sensor as
determined by P5, refer
to TEMPERATURE
SENSOR Service
Section 6.23.
AL57 Invalid Ambient Ambient Test the AMBS, refer to Replace AMBS if
Ambient Temperature Sensor Temperature Sensor Checkout defective, refer to
Sensor (AMBS) reading. Sensor (AMBS) Procedure Section 6.23.1. TEMPERATURE
(AMBS) SENSOR Service
Section 6.23.
AL58 High pressure safety High Pressure Test the HPS; refer to Replace HPS if
Compressor switch remains open Switch (HPS) Checking High Pressure defective, refer to
High Pressure for at least one minute. Switch, Section 6.9.1. Sensor Replacement,
Safety (HPS) Section 6.23.
Refrigeration Check unit for air flow Clean or remove any
System restrictions. debris from coils.
AL59 Heat Termination Heat Termination Check for 24 volts at test Replace HTT if
Heater Thermostat (HTT) is Thermostat (HTT) point TP10, if no voltage at defective, refer to
Termination open. TP10 after unit has Sensor Replacement
Thermostat reached set point HTT is Section 6.23.
(HTT) open.
AL60 Failure of the Defrost Defrost Test the DTS; refer to Replace the DTS if
Defrost Temperature Sensor Temperature Sensor Checkout Proced- defective, refer to
Temperature (DTS) to open. Sensor (DTS) ure Section 6.23.1. Sensor Replacement
Sensor (DTS) Section 6.23.
AL61 Improper current draw Heater(s) While in heat or defrost Replace heater(s) if
Heater during heat or defrost mode, check for proper defective, refer to
Current Draw mode. current draw at heater section 6.13.2
Fault contactors, refer to Evaporator Heater
ELECTRICAL DATA Removal and
Section 2.3. Replacement.
Contactor Check voltage at heater Replace heater contact-
contactor on the heater or if defective.
side. If no voltage present:
AL63 Unit operating above Refrigeration Check unit for air flow Clean or remove any
Current Limit current limit. System restrictions. debris from coils.
Check unit for proper Repair as needed.
operation.
Power supply Confirm supply voltage/fre- Correct power supply.
quency is within specifica-
tion and balanced accord-
ing to ELECTRICAL DATA
Section 2.3.
Current limit set Check current limit setting The current limit can be
too low. Code Cd32. raised (maximum of 23
amps) using Cd32.
AL64 Discharge Discharge Test the CPDS; refer to Replace the CPDS if
Discharge Temperature sensor temperature Sensor Checkout defective, refer to
Temperature out of range. sensor (CPDS). Procedure, Section Sensor Replacement
Sensor 6.23.1. Section 6.23.
(CPDS)

T-362 3−34
 Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 7 of 8)

Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions

AL65 Compressor Compressor Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if
Discharge Discharge Transducer Discharge pressure readings, refer to defective.
Pressure is out of range. Transducer (DPT) MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Transducer Section 6.2.
(DPT)
AL66 Suction Pressure Suction Pressure Confirm accurate EPT and Replace EPT/SPT if
(SPT) Suction Transducer (SPT) out Transducer (SPT) SPT pressure readings, defective.
Pressure of range. refer to MANIFOLD
Transducer, GAUGE SET Section 6.2.
(EPT) - Performing a Pre-trip 5-9
Evaporator test will also check the
Pressure transducers.
Transducer
Monitor If the alarm persists, it
may indicate a failing
compressor, refer to
COMPRESSOR
Service Section 6.8.
AL67 Humidity Sensor (HS) Humidity
Sensor Make sure the humidity Monitor, replace HS if
Humidity reading out of range. (HS) sensor is properly connec- alarm persists.
Sensor ted in the socket.
Make sure the humidity
sensor wires have not been
damaged.
AL69 Evaporator Temperat- Evaporator Tem- Test the ETS1, refer to Replace Evaporator
Evaporator ure Sensor (ETS1) out perature Sensor Sensor Checkout Proced- Temperature Sensor
Temp Sensor of range. (ETS1) ure Section 6.13.2. (ETS1) if defective.
(ETS1)
AL70 Secondary Supply Secondary Supply Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Secondary Sensor (SRS) is out of Sensor (SRS) action is required.
Supply Sensor range. If P5 fails, replace the
(SRS) defective sensor as
determined by P5, refer
to TEMPERATURE
SENSOR Service
Section 6.23.
AL71 Secondary Return Secondary Return Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Secondary Sensor (RRS) is out Sensor (RRS) action is required.
Return Sensor of range. If P5 fails, replace the
(RRS) defective sensor as
determined by P5, refer
to TEMPERATURE
SENSOR Service
Section 6.23.
AL72 After the unit goes Refrigeration Ensure unit is operating Power cycle unit.
Control Temp in-range for 30 System correctly. Control Temperature is
Out of Range minutes then out of in In-range.
range for a continuous
120 minutes. Any Pre-trip mode, re-
sets the timers.

3−35 T-362
 Table 3−6 Controller Alarm Indications (Sheet 8 of 8)

NOTE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms AL70 and
AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 3−10, page 3−45.
The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs, an “ERR”
alarm will appear on the display. This is an indication the controller needs to be re-
placed.
ERROR DESCRIPTION
ERR 0-RAM failure Indicates that the controller working memory has failed.
ERR 1-Program Memory
failure Indicates a problem with the controller program.
ERR 2-Watchdog The controller program has entered a mode whereby
time-out the controller program has stopped executing.
ERR 3-N/A N/A
ERR 4-N/A N/A
The controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter has
ERR 5-A-D failure failed.
ERR 6-IO Board failure Internal program/update failure.
ERR Internal ERR 7-Controller failure Internal version/firmware incompatible.
# Microprocessor
Failure ERR 8-DataCORDER
failure Internal DataCORDER memory failure.
ERR 9-Controller failure Internal controller memory failure.
In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the status
LED will indicate the appropriate ERR code using Morse code as shown below.
E R R 0 to 9
ERR0 = . .-. .-. -----
ERR1 = . .-. .-. . ----
ERR2 = . .-. .-. . . ---
ERR3 = . .-. .-. . . . --
ERR4 = . .-. .-. . . . . -
ERR5 = . .-. .-. . . . . .
ERR6 = . .-. .-. -. . . .
ERR7 = . .-. .-. --. . .
ERR8 = . .-. .-. ---. .
ERR9 = . .-. .-. ---- .
Entr Enter Set point
StPt (Press Arrow & The controller is prompting the operator to enter a set point.
Enter)
Low Main Voltage
(Function Codes
This message will be alternately displayed with the set point whenever the supply
LO Cd27-38 disabled voltage is less than 75% of its proper value.
and NO alarm
stored.)

T-362 3−36
3.12 CONTROLLER PRE−TRIP TEST CODES
Table 3−7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes (Sheet 1 of 6)

NOTE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu in-
cludes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts. “Auto3” menu includes P0, P1,
P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8.
Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20 Container Unit
Model Number, & configuration database identifier CFMMYYDD are displayed in
sequence.
Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU according to
whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received since the unit was
Pre-Trip Initiated: booted.
Configuration
P0-0 Display, Indicator Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to seek to its
Lamps, LEDs, and closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to
Displays the closed position. No other autoslide mode of operation will be available until
the two cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are no test
codes or results associated with this phase of Pretrip. To know if the test passes
the operator must observe that the LCD display elements and the indicator lights
behave as described below.
P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range.
No other system components will change state during this test.
Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the heater
is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again. The
P1-0 Heaters Turned On change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the heater
is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again. The
P1-1 Heaters Turned Off change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within
specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water Pressure Switch is
open this test will be skipped.
Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and con-
denser fan is then turned on. After 15 seconds the current draw is measured
P2-0 Condenser Fan On again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
Condenser fan is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is meas-
P2-1 Condenser Fan Off ured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed evap-
orator fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low speed evap-
orator fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other system components will
change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of either
test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the test will fail
upon conclusion of the test.
High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans will be
Low Speed turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the low speed
P3-0 Evaporator Fan evaporator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is measured
Motors On again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
Low Speed Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current
P3-1 Evaporator Fan draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Motors Off Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

3−37 T-362
 Table 3−7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes (Sheet 2 of 6)
P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on, then off.
Current draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed specified ratios. No
other system components will change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of either
test, the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, the test will fail upon conclu-
sion of the test.
Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured, then high
speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is
High Speed measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
P4-0 Evaporator Fan Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND measured cur-
Motors On
rent changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is skipped.
High Speed High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current
P4-1 Evaporator Fan draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Motors Off Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature Sensors.
The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes, with all
other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made between the
return and supply probes.
Supply/Return Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
P5-0 Probe Test
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
test and the PRIMARY/ SECONDARY) pass, display will read “P5” “PASS.”
This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and secondary supply
probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
P5-1 Supply Probe Test
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
and the SUPPLY/RETURN TEST) pass, because of the multiple tests, the
display will read “P5” “PASS.”
For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between return temperature sensor (RTS) and return
temperature sensor (RRS) probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.

NOTES
P5-2 Return Probe Test
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests
(this test and the SUPPLY/RETURN) pass, because of the multiple
tests, the display will read “P 5,” “PASS.”

2. The results of Pre-trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to activate or
clear control probe alarms.
With evaporator fan running on high speed, measure the temperature difference
between the primary supply and primary return probes. Turn the heaters on for
60 seconds then measure the temperature difference between the primary sup-
Evaporator Fan ply and primary return probes for up to 120 additional seconds.
P5-3 Direction Test
This is a Pass/Fail test. The test passes if differential of STS is 0.25C higher
than RTS.
Test P5-0 must pass before this test is run.

T-362 3−38
 Table 3−7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes (Sheet 3 of 6)
Primary .vs Sec- This is a Pass/Fail test of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1) and
ondary Evaporator secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2).
P5-7 Temperature Test passes if secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2) is within +/- 0.5C
Sensor Test of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1).
This is a Pass/Fail test of the Primary Evaporator Pressure Transducer.
Primary Evaporator
Pressure Trans- Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 0 psi of saturation
P5-8 ducer Test pressure at current evaporator temperature. Also passes if SPT is within +/- 1 psi of
discharge pressure 6 hours after a power interruption.
Test P5-7 must pass before this test is run.
Units equipped with a secondary Evaporator pressure transducer.
Suction (Evaporat- Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 1.5 psi of the evapor-
P5-9 or) Pressure Trans- ator pressure transducer (EPT).
ducer Test
Test P5-8 must pass before this test is run.
This is a Pass/Fail/Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
Humidity Sensor
Controller Configur- Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout is great-
P5-10 er than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
ation Verification
Test Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor out and
Vout is less than 0.20 Volts.
Test P5-9 must pass before this test is run.
This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is present).
Humidity Sensor Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
P5-11 Installation Verifica-
tion Test Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.
This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Humidity Sensor Test passes if Vout for the humidity sensor is between 0.33 Volts and 4 Volts.
P5-12 Range Check Test Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
Test P5-11 must pass before this test is run.
P6 Tests - Refrigerant Probes, Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: Pass/Fail testing is performed for the
compressor, EEV, DUV, LIV (if equipped), ESV, and the refrigerant pressure and temperature sensors.
Discharge
P6-0 Thermistor Test If Alarm 64 is active the test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
Suction If the Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) both is configured ON and is invalid,
P6-1 Thermistor Test the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
Discharge Pressure If Alarm 65 is active any time during the first 45 second period, the test fails.
P6-2 Transducer Test Otherwise, the test passes.
Suction Pressure
P6-3 Transducer Test If Alarm 66 is active the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.

Compressor Compressor current is tested before and 10 seconds after start up. If current
P6-4 Current Draw Test does not increase, the test fails. P6-7 is run at the end of P6-4. If this test fails,
P6-6 is skipped.
Pre-trip P6-5 ensures that the compressor holds pressure. After compressor
Compressor Leak pump up and pump down, the compressor is turned off for 62 seconds. When
P6-5 Test suction side pressure holds (less than 8 psi rise) for 10 seconds, P6-5 passes,
otherwise the Compressor Leak Test fails.

3−39 T-362
 Table 3−7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes (Sheet 4 of 6)
NOTE
P6-6 through P6-10 are conducted by changing status of each valve and comparing suction pressure change
and/or compressor current change with predetermined values. Tests will cause compressor and condenser
fans to cycle on and off as needed to generate the pressure required for individual Pre-trip sub tests. The com-
pressor will start in order to build discharge pressure, followed by compressor pump down sequence. At the
conclusion of compressor pump down sequence, the compressor will shut down and the valve test will start.
Economizer Passes if suction pressure increases a minimum of 4 psia when the valve opens
P6-6 Valve Test for 15 seconds.
Digital Unloader Passes if pressure and current changes are within 3 seconds of DUV switch sig-
P6-7 Valve Test nal and either the pressure change or the current draw change is above 5 psi or
above 1.5A, respectively.
Liquid Injection (If equipped) Test passes if change of suction pressure is greater than 4 psia
P6-9 Valve Test when the valve opens for 10 seconds. Otherwise, it fails.
Electronic The test records the suction pressure during the open valve position and passes
P6-10 Expansion Valve if the suction pressure increase is above 3 psi when the valve opens for 10
Test seconds.
NOTE
P7-0 & P8 are included with “Auto 2 & Auto 3” only. P9-0 through P10 are included with “Auto2” only.
P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure that
the HPS opens and closes properly.
Test is skipped if sensed ambient temperature is less than 7.2C (45F), return
air temperature is less than -17.8C (0F), or the water pressure switch is open.
With the unit running, the condenser fan is turned off and a 900 second (15 min-
ute) timer is started. The right display shows Discharge Pressure if the sensor is
configured and valid, else Discharge Temperature. The unit needs to disable Dis-
charge Pressure limit and enable Current Limit checks.
The test fails immediately if:
-Ambient Temperature Sensor invalid
P7-0 High Pressure -Composite Return Temperature Sensor invalid
Switch (HPS)
Opening Test -HPS is open
The test fails if:
-HPS fails to open before 900 seconds total test time.
-Evaporator or Compressor IP Alarm.
-Calculated Dome Temperature exceeds 137.78C (280F).
-Discharge pressure exceeds 370 psig.
-Compressor Current exceeds limits
The test passes if HPS opens within the 15 minute time limit.
If return temperature greater than -2.4C, set setpoint to -5.0C, else set set-
point to -30C. Restart unit according to normal startup logic. Run unit normally
High Pressure for 120 seconds.
P7-1 Switch (HPS)
The test passes if the high pressure switch closes within 75 seconds after end of
Closing Test
Test 7-0, else the test fails.
Test P7-0 must pass for this test to execute.

T-362 3−40
 Table 3−7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes (Sheet 5 of 6)
P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pretrip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been skipped for
these tests to execute.
If the control temperature is below 15.6C., the setpoint is changed to 15.6C.,
and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in the equival-
ent of normal heating. If the control temperature is above 15.6C. at the start of
the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 8-1. While in test 8-0 the right
Perishable Mode display will show the value of the control temperature.”
P8-0 Test
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no pass
display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint, the test pro-
ceeds to test 8-1.
Control temperature must be at least 15.6C (60F).
The set point is changed to 0C (32F), and a 180-minute timer is started. The
left display will read “P8-1,” the right display will show the supply air temperature.
The unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the 0C set point.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches set point before the
Perishable Mode 180-minute timer expires.
Pull Down Test /
P8-1 eAutofresh CO2 On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is present,
Sensor Calibration calibration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1. Once P8-1 begins,
calibration will be attempted when the supply temperature goes below 5C. If
the CO2 sensor voltage reads within the 0.95 <>1.15Vdc range before the end of
P8-1, the sensor will be calibrated by holding the CO2 zero line low for 4
seconds. Once calibration is performed, the sensor voltage will be verified to
make sure it is in the 0.95 to 1.05 Vdc range. If the voltage is not within this
range, CO2 sensor calibration fails.
Test P8-1 must pass for P8-2 to execute.
A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize control
temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the timer expires.
The control temperature will be sampled each minute starting at the beginning of
P8-2.
Perishable Mode During P8-2, the left display will read “P8-2,” and the right display will show the
P8-2 Maintain Tempera- supply air temperature.
ture Test When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be
compared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0C, or if the
DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the control
probe temperature will be recorded as -50.0C.

3−41 T-362
 Table 3−7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes (Sheet 6 of 6)
P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metallic con-
tacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs, the DTT func-
tion determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or CLOSED contacts.
Primarily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the Defrost Termination Sensor.
During P9-0 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be displayed on
the left display. The right display will show the supply air temperature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is consid-
ered closed. This step may not have to be executed. Once the DTT is consid-
ered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running the heaters for up to two
hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
DTT Closed and
P9-0 Open Test Test fails if:
The DTT is not considered closed after the 30 minutes of full cooling
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air temperature rises
above 248C (120F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle time limit.
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:
If the container temperature is below 7.2C, the setpoint is changed to 7.2C.,
and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in the equival-
ent of normal heating. If the container temperature is above 7.2C. at the start of
the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 10-1. During this test, the
Frozen Mode control temperature will be shown on the right display.
P10-0 Heat Test
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no pass
display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint, the test pro-
ceeds to test 10-1.
Control temperature must be at least 7.2C (45F)
The setpoint is changed to -17.8C. The system will then attempt to pull down
the control temperature to setpoint using normal frozen mode cooling. During
Frozen Mode this test, the control temperature will be shown on the right display.
P10-1 Pulldown Test
The test passes if the control temperature reaches setpoint minus 0.3C before
the 180 minute timer expires. Otherwise, the test fails. Upon failure and when ini-
tiated by an automatic Pre-trip sequence, P10-1 will auto-repeat once by starting
P10-0 over again.
Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute.
Same as for test 8-2 except the control temperature is the return probe temper-
Frozen Mode ature.
P10-2 Maintain The average error must be +/-1.6C. If the DataCORDER supply temperature
Temperature Test probe is invalid, the test fails and the control probe temperature will be recorded
as -50C. Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pre-trip sequence,
P10-2 will auto-repeat by starting P10-0 over again.

T-362 3−42
 Table 3−8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments
NOTE
Inapplicable Functions Display “‐‐‐‐‐”
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then CODE SELECT key
Code
No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Recorder Supply
dC1 Temperature Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
Recorder Return
dC2 Temperature Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
USDA 1,2,3 Temper-
dC3-5 atures Current readings of the three USDA probes.

Network Data Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point 1
dC6-13 Points 1-8 (Code 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained from the
controller once every minute.
Cargo Probe 4 Tem-
dC14 perature Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
Temperature Sen- Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply, return,
dC20-24 sors 1-5 Calibration USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the interrogation pro-
gram.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters. Function
code dC26 contains the first four characters. Function code dC27 contains
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 the last four characters. (This serial number is the same as the controller
serial number.)
An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the Data-
dC28 Minimum Days Left CORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the system
Date of Last Trip goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip start will auto-
dC30 start matically be generated on the next AC power up. Press and hold “ENTER”
key for five seconds to initiate a “Trip Start.”
Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
dC31 Battery Test Results
PASS: Battery pack is fully charged. FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
Cargo Probe 4 Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via the
dC35 Calibration interrogation program.

3−43 T-362
 Table 3−9 DataCORDER Pre-trip Result Records

Test
No. TITLE DATA

1-0 Heater On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in current for Phase A, B and C

1-1 Heater Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) - Open/Closed,
2-0 Condenser Fan On Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
Low Speed Evaporator Fan
3-0 On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C

Low Speed Evaporator Fan

3-1 Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C

High Speed Evaporator Fan

4-0 On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C

High Speed Evaporator Fan

4-1 Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C

5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
Secondary Supply Probe
5-1 (SRS)Test Pass/Fail/Skip

Secondary Return Probe

5-2 (RRS) Test Pass/Fail/Skip

6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip

6-1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
Discharge Pressure
6-2 Transducer Test Pass/Fail/Skip

Suction Pressure Transducer

6-3 Test Pass/Fail/Skip

Compressor Current Draw

6-4 Test Pass/Fail/Skip

6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pass/Fail/Skip

6-6 Economizer Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
Liquid Injection Valve Test (If
6-9 equipped) Pass/Fail/Skip

Electronic Expansion Valve

6-10 Test Pass/Fail/Skip

Pass/Fail/Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)

7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed Input values that component opens
Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open Input values that component closes
8-0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16C (60F)
Perishable Mode Pulldown
8-1 Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0C (32F)

Perishable Mode Maintain Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply temperature

8-2 Test (SRS) over last recording interval.
Pass/Fail/Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage, line
9-0 Defrost Test frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8C (0F).
Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return temperature
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test (RRS) over last recording interval.

T-362 3−44
 Table 3−10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50C to
70C (-58F to +158F), or the probe check logic has determined there is
Recorder Supply a fault with this sensor.
dAL70 Temperature Out of
Range NOTE
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50C to
70C (-58F to +158F), or the probe check logic has determined there is
Recorder Return a fault with this sensor.
dAL71 Temperature Out of
Range NOTE
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
USDA Temperatures The USDA probe temperature reading is outside of -50C to 70C
dAL72-74 1, 2, 3 Out of Range (-58F to +158F) range.
Cargo Probe 4 Out of The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of -50C to 70C
dAL75 Range (-58F to +158F) range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion and are not in use at this time.
The network data point is outside of its specified range. The DataCORD-
ER is configured by default to record the supply and return recorder sen-
sors. The DataCORDER may be configured to record up to eight addition-
Network Data Point al network data points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85) is assigned to
dAL78-85 1 - 8 Out of Range
each configured point. When an alarm occurs, the DataCORDER must be
interrogated to identify the data point assigned. When a humidity sensor is
installed, it is usually assigned to AL78.
The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to adequately
maintain the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the unit. If this alarm
occurs, replace the RTC battery at the next available opportunity. After
replacing the battery the following actions are required:
dAL86 RTC Battery Low
− Update the RTC setting
− Update the unit’s software configuration
− Update the operational software
− Update all user selectable function code settings (defrost, setpoint, etc)
An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORDER run time hour
and minute have not changed at the start of the hour, or the real time
dAL87 RTC Failure clock (RTC) time has gained or lost more than 2 minutes in the hour. This
situation may be corrected by cycling the power, setting the clock or meet-
ing the above criteria for an hour.
DataCORDER
dAL88 EEPROM Failure A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EEPROM has failed.
An error has been detected in the process of writing daily data to the
dAL89 Flash Memory Error non-volatile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full (eight alarms).

3−45 T-362
 SECTION 4
OPERATION
4.1 INSPECTION (Before Loading) 4.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power
1. Make sure start−stop switch (ST on control panel)
and circuit breaker (CB−1 in the control box) are in
position “0” (OFF).
WARNING 2. Plug the 460 VAC (yellow) cable into a de−energized
380/460 VAC, 3−phase power source. Energize the
Beware of unannounced starting of the power source. Place circuit breaker (CB−1) in posi-
evaporator and condenser fans. The unit tion “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.
may cycle the fans and compressor unex-
pectedly as control requirements dictate. 4.2.2 Connection To 190/230 VAC Power
An autotransformer (Figure 4−1) is required to allow
a. Check inside for the following: operation on nominal 230 volt power. It is fitted with a
230 VAC cable and a receptacle to accept the standard
1. Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. 460 VAC power plug. The 230 volt cable is black in color
Channels must be free of debris for proper air cir- while the 460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may
culation. also be equipped with a circuit breaker (CB−2). The
transformer is a step up transformer that will provide
2. Check container panels, insulation and door seals 380/460 VAC, 3−phase, 50/60 Hz power to the unit
for damage. Effect permanent or temporary repairs. when the 230 VAC power cable is connected to a
190/230 VAC, 3−phase power source.
3. Visually check evaporator fan motor mounting bolts
for proper securement (refer to paragraph 6.14). 1. Make sure that the start−stop switch (ST, on control
panel) and circuit breakers CB−1 (in the control box
4. Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and CB−2 (on the transformer) are in position “0”
and fan deck (refer to paragraph 6.15). (OFF). Plug in and lock the 460 VAC power plug at the
receptacle on the transformer.
5. Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fans or fan 2. Plug the 230 VAC (black) cable into a de−energized
deck and clean if necessary. 190/230 VAC, 3−phase power source. Energize the
power source. Set circuit breakers CB−1 and CB−2 to
6. Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstruc- position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.
tions. Wash with fresh water (refer to Section 6.15).
7. Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstruc-
tions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water. 2 3
8. Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and
condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in
place on access panels. 1

b. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with

fresh water (refer to paragraph 6.10).
c. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical con-
nections or hardware.
d. Check color of moisture−liquid indicator.

1. Dual Voltage Modular Autotransformer

4.2 CONNECT POWER
2. Circuit Breaker (CB−2) 230−Volt
3. 460 VAC Power Receptacle
Figure 4−1 Autotransformer
WARNING
4.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) be- The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide
fore turning OFF start−stop switch (ST), ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
unit circuit breaker(s) and external power circulation. The vent must be closed when transporting
source. frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential,
which will vary depending on the container and how the
container is loaded.
WARNING Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor
(VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air
Make sure the power plugs are clean and vent (upper or lower, as equipped) and sends data to the
dry before connecting to power receptacle. controller display.

4−1 T-362
4.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 4.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent
Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh a. Full Open or Closed Positions
Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a
0 to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% Maximum air flow is achieved by loosening the wing
air flow. nuts and moving the cover to the maximum open
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut position (100% position). The closed position is 0% air
and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow position. The operator may also adjust the opening
flow matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut. to increase or decrease the air flow volume to meet the
required air flow.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut
until the disc clears the stop. b. Reduced Flow for Lower Fresh Air Makeup
Figure 4−2 gives air exchange values for an empty
container.
NOTE
Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded In order to prevent inaccurate display readings
container. on units equipped with a Vent Position Sensor
AIR (VPS), ensure that the rack and pinion drive of
FLOW the VPS is not disrupted when adjusting the air
(CMH) 50HZ makeup vent.
250

TBAR NOTE
200 1 1/2” Do not loosen the hex nut beyond its stop.
Doing so may cause inaccurate display
TBAR readings and errors in DataCORDER reports.
2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3”
Similar to the Upper Fresh Air Makeup vent, two slots
and a stop are designed into the Lower Fresh Air slide
for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0 to
100 25% air flow; the second slot allows for a 25 to 100% air
flow. To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the hex
nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air
50 flow matches with the arrow. Tighten the hex nut. To
clear the gap between the slots, loosen the hex nut until
the disc clears the stop.
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 On some models the air slide is supplied with two
PERCENT OPEN
adjustable air control discs. The fresh air makeup can be
adjusted for 15, 35, 50 or 75 cubic meters per hour
AIR (CMH). The air flow has been established at 60 Hz
FLOW power and 2−1/2 inch T bar and with 15 mm (0.6 inch)
(CMH) 60HZ H2O external static above free blow.
300
Loosen the hex nut, adjust each disc to the required air
TBAR flow, then tighten hex nut.
250 1 1/2”

TBAR NOTE
200 2 5/8” The main air slide is in the fully closed position
TBAR 3”
during reduced air flow operation when
150 equipped with air control discs.
c. Air Sampling for Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Level
100
Loosen hex nuts and move the cover until the arrow on
the cover is aligned with the “atmosphere sampling port”
50 label. Tighten the hex nuts and attach a 3/8 in. hose to
the sampling port.
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
If the internal atmosphere content has reached an
PERCENT OPEN
unacceptable level, the operator may adjust the disc
opening to meet the required air flow volume to ventilate
Figure 4−2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart the container.

T-362 4−2
4.3.3 Vent Position Sensor 4.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection
Pre−trip testing of the eAutoFresh system is performed
The VPS allows the user to determine the position of the during Pre−Trip test P0. Operation of the system may be
fresh air vent via Cd45. This function code is accessible observed during this test.
via the Code Select key. Upon initiation of Pre−Trip P0, the current state will be
saved and the vent will fully close. This will be followed
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever by two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to
motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is the closed position. No other eAutoFresh mode of
detected. It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM). operation will be available until the two cycles of opening
Scrolling to Cd45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Position. and closing have completed. Upon termination of the
test, the vent will open to the previous state and
operation will return to the previous mode.
The position of the vent will be recorded in the
If the last mode was gASLM, the vent will open to the
DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC preset FLO setting, the controller will start taking new
power and any of the following:
readings and control based on those readings.
4.4.2 eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure
Trip start
To start the system, do the following:
On every power cycle a. Press the “CODE SELECT” key (see Figure 3−2).
b. Press the “UP or DOWN“ arrow key until “Cd43“ is
displayed, then press “ENTER”.
Midnight
c. Press the “UP or DOWN“ arrow key to access the de-
sired mode of operation. When the mode operation is
Manual changes greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) displayed press the enter key to access the submenu
remaining in the new position for at least four minutes parameters.
4.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation
NOTE
NOTE
When setting any mode of operation, complete
The user has four minutes to make necessary the entire process to ensure all parameters are
adjustments to the vent setting. This time calcu- set.
lation begins on the initial movement of the
sensor. The vent can be moved to any position a. OFF
within the four minutes. On completion of the A setting of OFF will disable all automatic venting
first four minutes, the vent is required to remain operations. The eAutoFresh vent will be driven fully
closed and the eAutoFresh opening set to 0 CMH in
stable for the next four minutes. If vent position Cd44. This is the default mode whenever a frozen mode
changes are detected during the four−minute of operation has been selected. When the frozen set
stability period, AL50 will be generated. This point is selected, the current eAutoFresh setting is
provides the user with the ability to change the saved. The vent position will be restored when a
vent setting without generating multiple events perishable set point is selected.
in the DataCORDER. b. USER
The USER mode provides ventilation for commodities
that require fresh air circulation. The flow rate can be
accessed through the submenu if a perishable set point
4.4 eAutoFresh OPERATION has been selected. To set the flow rate, press the
ENTER key to activate the selection mode. When FLO
appears in the left hand window, use the UP or DOWN
The eAutoFresh system allows the opening and closing arrow key to scroll to the desired opening. The range is
of the mechanical air vent slide. The opening and
from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5. Press
closing of the slide is determined by the mode selected the ENTER key to set the value and begin operation.
through Cd43.
c. TEST
The modes of operation are OFF, USER, TEST, DELAY, TEST mode allows the operator to test the movement of
and GASLIMIT. Each mode of operation has submenus the mechanical slide air vent and calibrate the CO2
with selectable parameters. Not all parameters are sensor.
available in each submenu. tESt − When “tESt” appears in the left window, press the
ENTER key to begin the test. The eAutoFresh slide will
Upon power up, the controller will fully close the open fully and then return to the closed position. The
eAutoFresh air vent. Nine seconds after power up, the test may be observed by the operator to ensure proper
controller will check if there is a carbon dioxide (CO2) operation of the vent. After completion of the TEST, the
sensor connected. When a CO2 sensor is detected, the unit will return to the previous mode of operation.
controller will enable access to the Gas Limit mode of NOTE
operation. If no sensor is detected, the only modes of
operation available will be Test, User, and Delay. The It is recommended that the calibration proced-
controller will then resume operation in the last mode of ure only be performed during Pre−trip or when
operation before power interruption. the container has been fully vented.

4−3 T-362
CAL will attempt to calibrate the CO2 sensor. When To operate in GAS LIMIT mode, scroll until gASLM
“CAL“ is selected the display will flash “CAL“. The appears in the left window, and press ENTER to activate
operator is to hold the “ENTER“ key for 5 seconds. The the submenu. The first selection is the maximum CO2
display will stop flashing and read “CAL“ for 5 seconds. level (CO2LM). Select the maximum CO2 level by using
The microprocessor will read the CO2 value, and then the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The range is from 0 to
compare that value to a known zero value. If the sensor 19% in 1% increments. Press ENTER to set the value
is within the calibration parameter range, the and move to the minimum O2 level (O2LM). The range is
microprocessor will determine the appropriate offset for from 2% to 20% in 1% increments. Press ENTER to set
the sensor. If the sensor is outside of this range, for the value and move to the FLO rate. Use the UP or
example if the container is loaded or has a high level of DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired FLO rate. The
CO2, the controller will flash “NOCAL“ for 5 seconds range is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5
then revert to the previous mode of operation. and 3 respectively. Press ENTER to set the value and
begin operation.
d. DELAY
In DELAY mode, the operation of the eAutoFresh Operational Parameters (Sub Menu Options):
system will be delayed for a set amount of time. This
allows time for the cargo to reach set point. In DELAY FLO indicates the opening to which the slide will move
mode, the eAutoFresh vent will open to the stored (FLO) based on the stored value in CMH (in increments of 5) or
value when the return air temperature sensor (RTS) is at CFM depending on the selection of Cd46 (Airflow dis-
or below set point plus the return offset value (rtn) or the play units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the
delay time (tIM), whichever comes first. The deg C/F key. CFM is displayed as CF, CMH is displayed
eAutoFresh vent will be fully closed when return air as CM.
temperature is greater than the set point plus the offset
temperature (rtn).
tIM is the time delay prior to the door opening. The time
To set the unit in Delay mode, scroll until “DELAY“ range is from 1 to 72 hrs in 1 hr increments.
appears in the left window, press ENTER to activate the
submenu. The first selection is the amount of time (tIM) CO2LM is the maximum level of CO2 that is allowed for
for the delay. Select the amount of time for the delay by the cargo. The range is from 0% to 19% in 1% incre-
using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The range is from ments, the default setting is 10.
1 to 72 hours in 1 hour increments. Press the ENTER
key to set the value and move to the FLO rate. Use the
UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired FLO rate. O2LM is the minimum level of O2 that is allowed for the
The range is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in cargo. The range is from 2% to 20% in 1% increments,
increments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press the ENTER the default setting is 10.
key to set the value and move to the return temperature
offset. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the Rtn is an offset value used to expand the return air tem-
desired rtn rate. The range of offset is from 0.6C to perature value to compensate for the fresh air entering
2.8C (1.0F to 2.8F) in 0.1 increments. Press the container. The allowable range is from 0.6C to
ENTER to set the value and begin operation. 2.8C or 1.0F to 5.0F in 0.1 increments the default
setting is 2.8C (5F).
e. GAS LIMIT (gASLM)
In GAS LIMIT mode, access to the submenu is available
provided a perishable set point has been selected, and a 4.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING
valid reading is detected from the CO2 sensor. In “Gas RECEPTACLE
limit” mode the microprocessor will monitor and limit the
level of CO2 in the container by opening and closing the
eAutoFresh vent. The vent will open to the (FLO) setting If remote monitoring is required, connect the remote
once the unit has completed initial temperature pull monitor plug at the unit receptacle, see Figure 2−5.
down or if the cargo temperature is within 5C of set
point and the CO2 level has reached the max limit or if When the remote monitor plug is connected to the re-
the O2 level has reached the lower limit. After the first 15 mote monitoring receptacle, the following remote cir-
minutes of the vent opening the controller will again cuits are energized:
evaluate the level of CO2, and/or O2 levels. If after the
first 15 minutes the gas limit values are satisfied, the
vent will close, if either gas limit has not been satisfied CIRCUIT FUNCTION
within 15 minutes the air exchange vent will open in 10
CMH increments every 15 minutes until both gas Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
concentrations are satisfied. Once all limits are satisfied
the vent will return to the closed position. If conditions Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
are not met with the slide open 100% for 90 minutes
AL29 will be activated. Sockets D to A Energizes remote in−range light

T-362 4−4
4.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS 4.8 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSIS

WARNING CAUTION
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) Pre−trip inspection should not be per-
(CB−1 & CB−2) and the START−STOP formed with critical temperature cargoes in
switch (ST) are in the “O” (OFF) position be- the container.
fore connecting to any electrical power
source.
CAUTION
NOTE
When Pre−trip key is pressed, economy,
The electronic phase detection system will dehumidification and bulb mode will be
check for proper compressor rotation within the deactivated. At the completion of Pre−trip
first 30 seconds. If rotation is not correct, the activity, economy, dehumidification and
compressor will be stopped and restarted in the bulb mode must be reactivated.
opposite direction. If the compressor is produc-
ing unusually loud and continuous noise after Pre−trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the unit
the first 30 seconds of operation, stop the unit components using internal measurements and
and investigate. comparison logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or
“FAIL” display to indicate test results.
4.6.1 Starting the Unit
The testing begins with access to a Pre−trip selection
a. With power properly applied, the fresh air vent in menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of
proper position, place the START−STOP switch to “I” two automatic tests.
(ON), see Figure 2−5.
These tests will automatically perform a series of
b. The Controller Function Codes for the container ID individual Pre−trip tests. The user may also scroll down
(Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model num- to select any of the individual tests.
ber (Cd20) will be displayed in sequence. When only the short sequence is configured, it will
c. Continue with Start Up Inspection, paragraph 4.7. appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will
indicate the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate
4.6.2 Stopping the Unit the long sequence. The test short sequence will run
To stop the unit, place the START−STOP switch in posi- tests P0 through P6. The long test sequence will run
tion “0” (OFF). tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the Pre−trip test codes is listed
4.7 START−UP INSPECTION in Table 3−7, page 3−37. If no selection is made, the
Pre−trip menu selection process will terminate
4.7.1 Physical Inspection automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb
mode must be reactivated manually if required.
Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER
4.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last
Check, and if required, reset controller Function Codes Pre−trip testing run. If no Pre−testing has been run (or
(Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired an individual test has not been run) since the unit was
operating parameters. Refer to Table 3−5. powered up, “−−−−” will be displayed.
4.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder To start a Pre−trip test, do the following:

DataCORDER NOTE
a. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Config- 1. Prior to starting a Pre−trip test, verify that
uration in accordance with desired recording parame- unit voltage (Cd07) is within tolerance and
ter. Refer to paragraph 3.8.3. unit amperage draw (Cd04, Cd05, Cd06)
are within expected limits. Otherwise, tests
b. Enter a “Trip Start.” To enter a “Trip Start,” do the fol- may fail incorrectly.
lowing:
2. All alarms must be rectified and cleared
1. Depress the ALT MODE key. When the left display before starting tests.
shows, dC, depress the ENTER key.
3. Pre−trip may also be initiated via
2. Scroll to Code dC30. communications. The operation is the
same as for the keypad initiation described
3. Depress and hold the ENTER key for five seconds. below except that should a test fail, the
4. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the Data- Pre−trip mode will automatically terminate.
CORDER. When initiated via communications, a
Pre−trip test may not be interrupted with an
4.7.4 Complete Inspection arrow key, but the Pre−trip test can be
terminated with the PRE−TRIP key.
Allow the unit to run for five minutes to stabilize condi-
tions, and then perform a Pre−trip diagnosis in accor- a. Press the PRE−TRIP key to accesses the Pre−trip
dance with Section 4.8. test selection menu.

4−5 T-362
b. TO RUN AN AUTOMATIC TEST: Scroll through the menu, the user may press the UP ARROW key.
selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN When this is done, all test outputs will be
ARROW keys to display AUTO, AUTO 1, AUTO 2 or de−energized and the test selection menu will be
AUTO 3 as desired, then press ENTER. displayed.
1. The unit will execute the series of tests without any 3. During Pre−trip testing, current limiting and pres-
need for direct user interface. These tests vary in sure limiting are both active, except during P−7
length, depending on the component under test. (High Pressure Switch Testing) when pressure lim-
2. While tests are running, “P#−#” will appear on the iting is turned off.
left display; the #’s indicate the test number and d. Pre−Trip Test Results
sub−test. The right display will show a countdown
time in minutes and seconds, indicating the At the end of the pre−trip test selection menu, the mes-
amount of time remaining in the test. sage “P,” “rSLts” (Pre−trip results) will be displayed.
Pressing the ENTER key will allow the user to see the
results for all subtests (i.e., 1−0, 1−1, etc).
CAUTION The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all
the tests run to completion since power up. If a test has
When a failure occurs during automatic not been run since power up, “-----” will be dis-
testing, the unit will suspend operation played.
awaiting operator intervention. Once all Pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification
and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if required.
When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A
repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown on
the right display, with the corresponding test number to 4.9 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS
the left.
A complete temperature probe check is performed dur-
The user may then press the DOWN ARROW to repeat ing the P5 Pre−trip test. A probe check is also run at the
the test, the UP ARROW to skip to the next test, or the end of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain on
PRE−TRIP key to terminate testing. The unit will wait in- during this period. If supply probes are within limits and
definitely or until the user manually enters a command. return probes are within limits, the unit will return to nor-
mal operation. During normal operation, the controller
continuously monitors and compares adjacent temper-
CAUTION ature probe readings.
The probe check procedure consists of running the
When Pre−trip test Auto2 runs to comple- evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to com-
tion without being interrupted, the unit will pare the readings from the adjacent temperature
terminate Pre−trip and display “Auto 2” probes. If a significant difference in temperature read-
“end.” The unit will suspend operation until ings is detected between probes, a defrost cycle, fol-
the user depresses the ENTER key! lowed by another probe check may be initiated. Any
continued disagreement between probes will prompt
When an Auto 1 Pre−trip test runs to completion without the controller to invalidate the failed temperature probe,
a failure, the unit will exit Pre−trip mode and return to and the backup probe will be used for temperature con-
normal control operation. However, dehumidification trol.
and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if required. In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return
c. TO RUN AN INDIVIDUAL TEST: Scroll through the probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe
selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN disagreement is considered a difference of 0.5C
ARROW keys to display an individual test code. (0.9F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/
Pressing ENTER when the desired test code is or a difference of 2.0C (3.6F) between the return air
displayed. sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can
trigger a defrost probe check.
1. Individually selected tests, other than the
LED/Display test, will perform the operations In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are
necessary to verify the operation of the considered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can
component. At the conclusion, PASS or FAIL will trigger a defrost probe check, which will occur when the
be displayed. This message will remain displayed difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0C
for up to three minutes, during which time a user (3.6F). Normally, the controlling probes are the return
may select another test. If the three minute time probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the
period expires, the unit will terminate pre−trip and supply probes are used for control purposes. Probe
return to control mode operation. disagreement of the non−controlling probe pair will not
trigger a defrost probe check.
2. While the tests are being executed, the user may
terminate the pre−trip diagnostics by pressing and If after the defrost probe check the supply probes agree
holding the PRE−TRIP key. The unit will then and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors
resume normal operation. If the user decides to are considered valid and the unit returns to normal con-
terminate a test but remain at the test selection trol.

T-362 4−6
In the Case of Probe Disagreement:
If the supply probes disagree and the return probes
CAUTION
agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply
probe. If the probe check is run as part of Pre−trip P−5, The unit will remain in the full cooling mode
an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is as long as the EB switch is in the On posi-
a run time defrost probe check, the invalidated probe will tion and the Mode Switch is in the Full Cool
be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, position. If the cargo can be damaged by
if the best supply probe is greater than 1.2C (2.2F) dif- low temperatures, the operator must monit-
ference with respect to its return probes, the best supply or container temperature and manually
probe is also invalidated. If unit is in Perishable Mode, a cycle operation as required to maintain
probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes. temperature within required limits.
If the supply probes agree and the return probes dis- When the Emergency Bypass switch is in the Bypass
agree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe position, the EBS will be enabled. With the Mode switch
check is being run as part of Pre−trip P−5, an alarm will
be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time in Full Cool mode, the following will occur
defrost probe check, the invalidated probe will be simultaneously:
passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best a. The EBS switch will enable EBS input.
return probe is greater than 1.2C (2.2F) difference
with respect to its supply probes, then the best return b. The phase detection circuit will detect the phase
probe is also invalidated. If the unit is in perishable rotation and close to provide power to the compressor
mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return contactor.
probes. c. The condenser fan contact will close to energize the
condenser contactor and provide power to the con-
denser fan motor.
4.10 EMERGENCY BYPASS OPERATION (option) d. The evaporator fan contact will close to energize the
high speed evaporator contactor and provide power
Emergency Bypass operation is used to override the to the evaporator fan motor.
controller, in the case of a controller malfunction, to keep
the unit cooling. When Emergency Bypass is installed e. The EBS electronic module will operate the EEV to
and turned on, the unit will remain in a continuous state control superheat.
of full cool until the Emergency Bypass switch is turned To return the unit to normal operation:
off.
1. Locate the connectors behind the compressor.
To place the unit in the Emergency Bypass Operation:
2. Disconnect the Emergency Bypass connector from
a. Locate the connection diagram and connectors for the EBS module connector and reconnect it to the
the emergency bypass (EB) sensors behind the top controller connector. See Figure 4−3.
left side of the compressor.
3. Inside the control box, place the EB switch in the Off
b. Disconnect the emergency bypass connector from position.
the controller connector and attach it to the emer- 4. Re-install the wire tie at the switch mounting.
gency bypass module connector. See Figure 4−3.
c. Locate the wire tire located at the EB switch in the
control box. EMERGENCY BYPASS
d. Cut the wire tie, then place the EB switch in the On po- CONNECTOR
sition.
e. Place the Mode Switch (MS) in the Full Cool position
to enable the system for cooling.
f. Manually control container air temperature by cycling
the Mode switch between Full Cool and evaporator
Fans Only.
To operate the fans only, the MODE switch must be in
the FANS ONLY position and the EMERGENCY
BYPASS switch must be in the Bypass position.
The EBS module uses the system’s safety devices (high
pressure switch, motor internal protectors, and heat
termination thermostat) to protect the system while in Figure 4−3 Diagram of Emergency Bypass
Emergency Bypass Mode. Connections

4−7 T-362
 SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
REMEDY/
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REFERENCE
SECTION
5.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS
External power source OFF Turn on
Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected 4.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuse (F3A/F3B) blown Check
Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 6.14
Condenser fan motor internal protector open 6.8
Compressor internal protector open 6.8
Component(s) not operating
High pressure switch open 5.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Malfunction of current sensor Replace
Low line voltage Check
Compressor hums, but does not Single phasing Check
start Shorted or grounded motor windings 6.8
Compressor seized 6.8
5.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING
Hot load Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant 6.3
Evaporator coil covered with ice 5.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris 6.13
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 6.13/6.14
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves
Refrigeration system partially closed completely
Dirty condenser 6.10.1
Compressor worn 6.8
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value 3.4.3
Economizer solenoid valve malfunction 6.20
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace

5−1 T-362
 REMEDY/
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REFERENCE
SECTION
5.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING
Abnormal pressures 5.7
Abnormal temperatures 5.15
Abnormal currents 5.16
Controller malfunction 5.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective 6.14
Refrigeration system
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves
partially closed completely
Frost on coil 5.10
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace
5.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING
Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open 6.14
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination thermostat open 6.13
Heater(s) defective 6.13
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating backwards 6.13/6.14
Unit will not heat or has insuffi- Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
cient heat Controller malfunction 5.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage 2.3
5.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction 5.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along with
the heat relay 6.13

5.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY

Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 3−5
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost Defective wiring Replace
automatically Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termination
thermostat open Replace
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Manual defrost switch defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost Keypad is defective Replace
manually
Defrost temperature sensor open Replace
Initiates but relay (DR) drops out Low line voltage 2.3

T-362 5−2
 REMEDY/
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REFERENCE
SECTION
5.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY (Continued)
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out 6.13
Frequent defrost Wet load Normal
5.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES
Condenser coil dirty 6.10.1
Condenser fan rotating backwards 6.10
Condenser fan inoperative 6.11
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 6.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator
pressure transducer (EPT) Replace
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged 6.12
Low suction pressure Low refrigerant charge 6.3
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 6.13
Excessive frost on evaporator coil 5.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 6.14.3
EEV control malfunction Replace
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Suction and discharge pres- Compressor operating in reverse 5.14
sures tend to equalize when unit Compressor cycling/stopped Check
is operating Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
5.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS
Compressor start up after an extended shutdown
Normal
Brief chattering when manually shut down
Compressor operating in reverse 5.14
Compressor
Loose mounting bolts or worn resilient mounts Tighten/Replace
Loose upper mounting 6.8.1
Liquid slugging 6.13
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Condenser or Evaporator Fan Worn motor bearings 6.11/6.14
Bent motor shaft 6.11/6.14
5.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Defective sensor 6.23
Will not control
Defective wiring Check
Low refrigerant charge 6.3

5−3 T-362
 REMEDY/
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REFERENCE
SECTION
5.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW
Frost on coil 5.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil 6.13
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 6.14
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective 6.14
No or partial evaporator air flow
Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective 6.14
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace
5.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd43 in Off mode 4.4.2
Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Vent not opening
Stepper drive defective 6.25.2
Stepper motor defective 6.25.4
Unit operating in frozen mode 4.4.3
Check CO2 sensor 4.4.3
Gas Limit mode unavailable Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Unit operating in frozen mode 4.4.3
“Enter“ Key not held for sufficient length of time 4.4.3
Unable to calibrate CO2 sensor CO2 outside of acceptable levels Check
Check CO2 sensor 4.4.3
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Code 44 displays “−−−−−”
Check CO2 sensor 4.4.3
5.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator
pressure transducer (EPT) Replace
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged 6.12
Low refrigerant charge 6.3
Low suction pressure No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 6.13
Excessive frost on evaporator coil 5.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 6.14.3
EEV control malfunction 6.16
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
Foreign material in valve 6.16
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator
pressure transducer (EPT) Replace
High suction pressure with low
superheat EEV control malfunction Replace
Ensure power-
Improperly seated powerhead head is locked
and in place
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator
pressure transducer (EPT) Replace
Liquid slugging in compressor
Failed EEV Replace

T-362 5−4
 REMEDY/
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REFERENCE
SECTION
5.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION
Circuit breaker (CB−1 or CB−2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective 6.21
Unit will not start
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle 4.2.2
5.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE

NOTE
The compressor may start in reverse for up to 10 seconds to determine correct phase rotation if
required for phase detection.
CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in internal
compressor damage. Turn the start−stop switch OFF immediately.
Incorrect wiring of compressor
Electrical Incorrect wiring of compressor contactor(s) Check
Incorrect wiring of current sensor
5.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES
Condenser coil dirty 6.10.1
Condenser fan rotating backwards 6.11
Condenser fan inoperative 6.11.1
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 6.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
High discharge temperature Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator
pressure transducer (EPT) Replace
Discharge temperature sensor drifting high Replace
Failed economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, or
economizer solenoid valve Replace
Plugged economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, or
economizer solenoid valve Replace
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
5.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS
Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check

5−5 T-362
 SECTION 6
SERVICE
NOTE When the Discharge Pressure Valve (4) is frontseated,
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever the discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the
removing refrigerant. When working with refrig- Discharge Pressure Gauge (3).
erants you must comply with all local govern- When both valves are backseated (all the way out), high
ment environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to pressure vapor will flow into the low side.
EPA section 608. When the Suction Pressure Valve (1) is open and the
Discharge Pressure Valve (4) shut, the system can be
charged through the Utility Connection (6). Oil can also
WARNING be added to the system.
A R-134a manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing ho-
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this ses (see Figure 6−2) is required for service of the mod-
WARNING can result in death, serious els covered within this manual. The manifold gauge/
personal injury and / or property damage. hose set is available from Carrier Transicold. (Carrier
Never use air or gas mixtures containing Transicold part number 07-00294-00, which includes
oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the items 1 through 6, Figure 6−2.)
product. If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was exposed to
Charge only with R−134a: Refrigerant must the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to remove
conform to AHRI Standard 700 contaminants and air as follows:
specification. 1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field service
couplings (see Figure 6−2) and midseat both hand
6.1 SECTION LAYOUT valves.
Service procedures are provided in this section 2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and re-
beginning with refrigeration system service, then frigerant 134a cylinder.
refrigeration system component service, electrical 3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge
system service, temperature recorder service and with R-134a to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1 kg/
general service. Refer to the Table of Contents to locate cm2 (1.0 psig).
specific topics.
4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and dis-
6.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET connect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready
for use.
The manifold gauge set (see Figure 6−1) is used to
determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant
charge, and to equalize or evacuate the system.

2 3

To Low Side
Access Valve
  ÂÂ
 Â To High Side
Access Valve

6 2
1

1 7 6 5 4
3
1. Suction Pressure Valve (shown backseated)
2. Suction Pressure Gauge
3. Discharge Pressure Gauge
7
4
 2 4 5

4. Discharge Pressure Valve (shown frontseated) 1. RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose
5. High Side Connection (SAE J2196/R-134a)
6. Utility Connection to: 2. Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme)
a. Refrigerant cylinder 3. YELLOW Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose
b. Vacuum Pump (SAE J2196/R-134a)
c. Oil Container 4. Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5)
7. Low Side Connection 5. High Side Field Service Coupling (Red Knob)
Figure 6−1 Manifold Gauge Set 6. BLUE Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose
(SAE J2196/R-134a)
When the Suction Pressure Valve (1) is frontseated 7. Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue Knob)
(turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be
checked at the Suction Pressure Gauge (2). Figure 6−2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set

6−1 T-362
6.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS a. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high
side service valve.
The compressor suction, compressor discharge, and
the liquid line service valves (see Figure 6−3) are pro- b. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set
vided with a double seat and an access valve which en- and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to be
ables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant lines. drawn down to low side pressure. This returns any liq-
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) uid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
will frontseat the valve to close off the line connection c. Backseat the low side service valve. Backseat both
and open a path to the access valve. Turning the stem field service couplings and frontseat both manifold
counterclockwise (all the way out) will backseat the hand valves. Remove couplings from access valves.
valve to open the line connection and close off the path
to the access valve. d. Install both service valve stem caps and service port
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and caps (finger-tight only).
backseat, both of the service valve connections are
open to the access valve path. 6.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated
when connecting a manifold gauge to measure To service the filter drier, economizer, expansion valves,
pressure. Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2 turn to economizer solenoid valve, digital unloader valve or
measure the pressure. evaporator coil, pump the refrigerant into the high side
2 as follows:
1 3

CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
4 compressor to evacuate the system below
6 7
5 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with
the suction or discharge service valves
1. Line Connection 5. Compressor Or Filter closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
2. Access Valve Drier Inlet Connection result from operating the compressor in a
3. Stem Cap 6. Valve (Frontseated) deep vacuum.
4. Valve stem 7. Valve (Backseated)
Figure 6−3 Service Valve Automatic Pump Down:
Connection of the manifold gauge/hose set (see To perform an Automatic Pump Down using Cd59 Pump
Figure 6−4) is dependent on the component being Down Logic, refer to Table 3−5 Controller Function
serviced. If only the compressor is being serviced, the Codes.
high side coupling is connected to the discharge service
valve. Manual Pump Down:
For service of the low side (after pump down), the high a. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor suction
side coupling is connected to the liquid line service and discharge service valves. Refer to paragraph 6.2.
valve. The center hose connection is brought to the tool
being used (vacuum, tank, etc.). b. Start the unit and run in the frozen mode (controller
Connecting the manifold gauge set: set below -10C (14F) for 10 to 15 minutes.
a. Remove service valve stem cap and to make sure the c. Check function code Cd21 (refer to paragraph 3.2.2).
valve is backseated. The economizer solenoid valve should be open. If
b. Remove access valve cap (See Figure 6−3). not, continue to run until the valve opens.
c. Connect the field service coupling (see Figure 6−2) to d. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. Place Start-
the access valve. Stop switch in the OFF position when the suction
d. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise, which reaches a positive pressure of 0.1 bar (1.4 psig).
will open the system to the gauge set. e. Frontseat the suction and discharge service valves.
e. To read system pressures, slightly midseat the ser- The refrigerant will be trapped between the compres-
vice valve. sor discharge service valves and the liquid line valve.
f. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side of the f. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight
gauge set. positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure
gauge. Remove power from the unit before opening
any part of the system. If a vacuum is indicated, emit
CAUTION refrigerant by cracking the liquid line valve momen-
tarily to build up a slight positive pressure.
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the
manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to g. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain
parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient
suction pressure before disconnecting. temperature before dismantling. This avoids internal
Removing the Manifold Gauge Set: condensation which puts moisture in the system.

T-362 6−2
h. After repairs have been made, be sure to perform a c. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above
refrigerant leak check (refer to Section 6.5), and 15.6C (60F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If
evacuate and dehydrate the low side (refer to the ambient temperature is lower than 15.6C
paragraph 6.6.1). (60F), ice might form before moisture removal is
complete. Heat lamps or alternate sources of heat
i. Check refrigerant charge (refer to Section 6.6). may be used to raise the system temperature.
6.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING d. Additional time may be saved during a complete sys-
tem pump down by replacing the filter drier with a sec-
tion of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings.
WARNING Installation of a new drier may be performed during
the charging procedure.
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this 4
WARNING can result in death, serious 1 2 3

ÉÉ
É
personal injury and / or property damage. 5
Never use air or gas mixtures containing
oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the
product. ÉÉ
É É
É
Charge only with R−134a: Refrigerant must
conform to AHRI Standard 700 6
specification.
a. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a
system is with a R-134a electronic leak detector.
É
Testing joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for S D
locating large leaks. 11
b. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system 9

ÂÂÂ
with refrigerant 134a to build up pressure between 2.1
to 3.5 bar (30.5 to 50.8 psig). To ensure complete

ÂÂÂ
pressurization of the system, refrigerant should be 7
charged at the compressor suction valve and the liq- 10
uid line service valve. Remove refrigerant cylinder 8
and leak-check all connections.

NOTE 1. Liquid Service 6. Suction Service

Only refrigerant 134a should be used to Connection Connection
pressurize the system. Any other gas or vapor 2 Economizer Solenoid 7. Vacuum Pump
will contaminate the system, which will require Valve 8. Electronic Vacuum
additional purging and evacuation of the 3. Receiver or Water Gauge
system. Cooled Condenser 9. Manifold Gauge Set
4. Compressor 10. Refrigerant Cylinder
c. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant
recovery system and repair any leaks. Check for 5. Discharge Service 11. Reclaimer
leaks. Connection
d. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit. (Refer to paragraph Figure 6−4 Refrigeration System Service
6.6.1.) Connections
e. Charge unit per paragraph 6.7.1. 6.6.3 Complete System

6.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION NOTE

Refer to Partial System procedure for informa-
6.6.1 General tion pertaining to partial system evacuation and
dehydration.
Moisture is detrimental to refrigeration systems. The
presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have a. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery
many undesirable effects. The most common are cop- system.
per plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of
metering devices by free water, and formation of acids, b. The recommended method to evacuate and dehy-
resulting in metal corrosion. drate the system is to connect evacuation hoses at
the compressor suction and liquid line service valve
6.6.2 Preparation (see Figure 6−4). Be sure the service hoses are
a. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test suited for evacuation purposes.
(refer to Section 6.5).
NOTE
b. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate To prevent the area between the Economizer
any system include a vacuum pump (8 m3/hr = 5 cfm Solenoid Valve (ESV) and the Compressor
volume displacement) and an electronic vacuum
gauge. The pump is available from Carrier from being isolated during evacuation, it is ne-
Transicold, P/N 07-00176-11. The micron gauge is cessary to open the ESV using a magnet tool,
P/N 07−00414−00. Carrier Transicold part number 07−00512−00.

6−3 T-362
c. Remove the ESV coil from the valve body. Place the 6.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge
magnet tool over the valve stem, an audible click will
be heard when the ESV opens. NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever
NOTE removing refrigerant. When working with refrig-
Make sure to replace the valve coil before re- erants you must comply with all local govern-
stating the unit. Starting the unit with the coil re- ment environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to
moved from the valve will burn out the coil.
EPA Section 608.
d. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating
the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum a. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor dis-
with the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut charge and suction service valves. For units operat-
off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. ing on a water cooled condenser, change over to air
Repair leaks if necessary. cooled operation.
b. Bring the container temperature to approximately
e. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
0C (32F) or below. Then set the controller set point
f. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum to -25C (-13F).
gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the c. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. If covering the
vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac- lower portion of the coil is not sufficient, remove the left
uum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the elec- hand infill panel and cover the left side of the coil. In-
tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut crease the area blocked until the compressor discharge
off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure pressure is raised to approximately 12.8 bar (185 psig).
the vacuum holds.
d. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be
g. Break the vacuum with either clean dry refrigerant 134a between the glasses. On units equipped with a water-
or dry nitrogen. Raise system pressure to roughly 0.14 cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of
bar (2 psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge. the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, contin-
h. If R134a was used, remove refrigerant using a refrig- ue with the following paragraphs to add or remove re-
erant recovery system. If nitrogen was used, relieve frigerant as required.
the pressure. 6.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge)
i. Repeat steps f. and g. one time. a. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. (Refer to
j. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter drier. paragraph 6.6.1.)
Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic b. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect charg-
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the ing line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge charg-
vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum ing line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cyl-
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture inder and refrigerant.
and/or leaks.
c. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line valve
k. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge half-way and allow liquid refrigerant to flow into the
may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con- unit until the correct weight of refrigerant (refer to pa-
tainer on weight scales. ragraph 2.2) has been added as indicated by scales.
6.6.4 Partial System NOTE
a. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low It may be necessary to finish charging unit
side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the through suction service valve in gas form, due
evacuation set-up at the compressor suction valve to pressure rise in high side of the system.
and the liquid service valve but leave the service
valves frontseated until evacuation is completed. d. Backseat manual liquid line valve (to close off gauge
b. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump port). Close liquid valve on cylinder.
has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to e. Start unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately 10
isolate the service connections and then continue minutes and check the refrigerant charge.
with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in 6.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial
accordance with normal procedures. Charge)
6.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE a. Examine refrigerant system for any evidence of
leaks, repair as necessary. (Refer to paragraph 6.5.).
WARNING b. Maintain the conditions outlined in paragraph 6.7.1.
c. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this the service port cap.
WARNING can result in death, serious d. Connect charging line between suction service valve
personal injury and / or property damage. port and cylinder of refrigerant R-134a. Open VAPOR
Never use air or gases containing oxygen valve.
(O2) for leak testing or operating the e. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service
product. valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant
Charge only with R−134a: Refrigerant must appears at the proper level. Be careful not to frontseat
conform to AHRI Standard 700 the suction valve fully, if the compressor is operated in
specification. a vacuum, internal damage may result.

T-362 6−4
6.8 COMPRESSOR g. Remove the Rotalock fittings from the suction and
discharge service connections, and uncouple the
unloader and economizer lines from the com-
pressor.
WARNING h. Cut the dome temperature sensor (CPDS) wires.
The replacement compressor comes with a CPDS
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and already assembled.
power plug disconnected before replacing i. Remove and save the compressor base mounting
the compressor. bolts. Discard the 4 top resilient mounts and wash-
ers.
j. Remove (slide out) the old compressor from the unit.
WARNING k. Inspect compressor base plate for wear. Replace, if
necessary.
Before disassembly of the compressor, be l. Wire tie the compressor base plate to the com-
sure to relieve the internal pressure very pressor, and slide the new compressor into the unit.
(Refer to Figure 6−5).
carefully by slightly loosening the cou-
plings to break the seal. 3 4
2

1
CAUTION 5

The scroll compressor achieves low suc-

tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
compressor to evacuate the system below
0 psig. Never operate the compressor with 2
11
the suction or discharge service valves 12
closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
result from operating the compressor in a 6
deep vacuum. 7
8
6.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor
7
a. Turn the unit ON and run it in full cool mode for 10 9
minutes. 10

NOTE 1. Compressor 7. SST Washers

If the compressor is not operational, front−seat 2. Teflon Seal for Valve 8. Resilient Mount
the suction and discharge service valves and Connection (2) 9. Mylar Washers
go to step e. below. 3. O−Ring (Unloader 10. Wire Ties
Connection) 11. Power Cable Gasket
b. Frontseat the manual liquid line valve and allow the 4. Compressor Dis− 12. Ground Connection
unit to pull−down to 0.1 kg/cm2 (1 psig). charge Temperature Screw
Sensor 13. Power Cable
c. Turn the unit start−stop switch (ST) and unit circuit
breaker (CB−1) OFF, and disconnect power to the 5. O−Ring (Economizer Lubricant − Krytox
unit. Connection) (Not Shown)
6. Base Mounting Bolts
d. Frontseat the discharge and suction service valves.
Figure 6−5 Compressor Kit
e. Remove all remaining refrigerant from the com-
pressor using a refrigerant recovery system.
NOTE
f. Remove the compressor terminal cover, disconnect DO NOT add any oil to the replacement com-
the ground wire and pull the cable plug from the com- pressor. Replacement compressor is shipped
pressor terminals. Install the terminal cover back with full oil charge of 60 oz.
after removing the power cable.
m. Cut and discard the wire ties used to hold the base
NOTE plate to the compressor.
Inspect the power cable (plug) terminals to en- n. Place the new SST washers on each side of the resi-
sure they are not deformed or have any signs of lient mounts, and the new Mylar washer on the bot-
heat or arcing. If any damage is noted, replace tom of it as shown in Figure 6−5. Install the four base
the power cable. mounting bolts loosely.

6−5 T-362
o. Place the new Teflon seals at the compressor suc- 6.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
tion and discharge ports as well as the O−rings at the
unloader and economizer line connection ports. 6.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch
Hand tighten all four connections.

p. Torque the four base−mounting screws to 6.2 mkg

WARNING
(45 ft−lbs). Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
pressure regulator.
q. Torque the compressor ports / connections to:
NOTE
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.
Service Valve / Connection Torque Value a. Remove switch as outlined in paragraph 6.9.2.
Suction and Discharge 108.5 to 135.5 Nm b. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch
Rotalocks (80 to 100 ft−lbs.) terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no resistance or
Unloader connection 24.5 to 27 Nm continuity light will be illuminated if the switch closed
(18 to 20 ft−lbs.) after relieving compressor pressure.
Economized connection 32.5 to 35 Nm c. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. (See
Figure 6−6.
(24 to 26 ft−lbs.)
1
r. Connect (butt−splice and heat shrink) the new com- 4
pressor dome temperature sensor with the old
sensor wires removed in step h. Wire−tie any loose
2 5
wiring as appropriate.

s. Evacuate the compressor to 1000 microns if the unit

was pumped down before the replaced compressor
was removed. Otherwise, evacuate the complete 3
unit and charge it with R−134a refrigerant (see Sec- 6
tions 6.6.1 and 6.7.1).

t. Open the compressor terminal cover and connect 1. Cylinder Valve 4. Pressure Gauge
the compressor power cable following the steps be- and Gauge (0 to 36 kg/cm2 =
low:
2. Pressure Regulator 0 to 400 psig)
3. Nitrogen Cylinder 5. Bleed-Off Valve
1. Liberally coat the orange gasket surfaces with the 6. 1/4 inch Connection
Krytox lubricant.
Figure 6−6 High Pressure Switch Testing
2. Install the orange gasket part onto the com- d. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4 kg/cm2 (375
pressor fusite with the grooved or threaded side psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
out. Ensure that the gasket is seated onto the fus-
e. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
ite base.
f. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to
increase pressure on switch. The switch should open
3. Coat the inside of the power plug (female) con- at a static pressure up to 25 kg/cm2 (350 psig). If a
nector pins with the Krytox lubricant, and insert the light is used, the light will go out. If an ohmmeter is
plug onto the compressor terminal connections. used, the meter will indicate open circuit.
Make sure, the orange gasket has bottomed out
onto the fusite and it fits securely onto the terminal g. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pressure.
pins while fully inserted into the orange plug. The switch should close at 18 kg/cm2 (250 psig).
6.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch
4. Connect the green ground wire to the grounding a. Remove the refrigerant charge.
tab located inside the terminal box of the com-
pressor using the self−tapping grounding screw. b. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high
Close the compressor terminal box using the ter- pressure switch is located on the discharge connec-
minal cover removed in step t. tion or line and is removed by turning counterclock-
wise.
u. Backseat all service valves, connect the power to the c. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying
unit and run it for at least 20 minutes. switch settings.
d. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge the system.
v. Perform a leak check of the system. e. Start the unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil level.

T-362 6−6
6.10 CONDENSER COIL h. Cut the top and bottom drain lines midway between
the side support bracket and the first cable tie, approx
The condenser coil consists of a series of parallel cop- 150mm (6”) from the side support bracket.
per tubes expanded into copper fins and formed into a
“C“ shape with the fourth side of the square formed by i. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the
the side support bracket. drain lines to allow the tubes to be slid back through
the side support bracket.
6.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning j. Remove filter drier.
To ensure optimal efficiency of the unit the condenser k. Unbraze the inlet connection to coil.
coil must be clean. The condenser coil should be
cleaned at least once a year, but more frequent cleaning l. Remove the cushion clamps securing the liquid line to
may be required depending on operating conditions. the top and bottom receiver brackets, retain all
The coil is cleaned with fresh water sprayed in the re- clamps and securing hardware.
verse direction of the air flow to remove any debris from m. Place a support under the condenser coil before re-
the coil. A high pressure washer is not required, mains leasing the coil from the frame.
water pressure is sufficient. To clean the condenser coil
perform the following procedure: n. Remove the lower mounting bracket bolts from the in-
side of the coil.
o. Remove the top mounting bracket bolts and grille ex-
WARNING tension mount from inside the coil.
p. Remove the side support bracket mounting bolts.
Do not remove the condenser fan grille q. Slide the condenser assembly with receiver out of the
before turning power OFF and disconnect- unit.
ing the power plug.
6.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation
a. Make sure the unit is powered off and the plug is dis- Before installing the new condenser coil, the receiver
connected. assembly and mounting hardware must be removed
from the old coil assembly:
b. Remove the condenser fan grille.
a. From the old coil, unbolt the receiver assembly from
c. Starting from the top of the coil, use a water hose with side support bracket.
a nozzle to wash the coil from the inside out. b. Unbraze the receiver assembly from the coil outlet
d. Systematically wash across the inside top face of the line and remove from the coil assembly.
coil until the water runs clean. c. Unbolt the side support bracket from the top and bot-
e. Wash down the center section, and then through the tom coil supports and remove from old coil.
bottom of the coil, continue washing until the water d. Refit the side support bracket to the new coil ensuring
runs clear. that the top and bottom are flush mounted with the coil
f. After the coil is clean, rinse the condenser fan to re- support.
move any dirt build up from the blades. 6.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation
g. Replace the condenser fan grille ensuring that it is Once the side support bracket has been secured to the
centered around the fan. new condenser coil, the entire assembly is ready to be
installed into the unit:
6.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal
a. Slide the new condenser coil into place ensuring the
a. Using a refrigerant reclaim system remove the refri- coil inlet connection is mated to the pipework and that
gerant charge. the coil is fully supported.
b. Secure the condenser coil into the unit using the re-
tained hardware; refit the mylar and fender washers:
WARNING 1. Refit the side support bracket bolts.
Do not remove the condenser fan grille 2. Refit the top support bracket bolts as well as the top
before turning power OFF and disconnect- grille extension support.
ing the power plug. 3. Refit the bottom support bracket bolts.
c. Braze the condenser coil inlet connection.
b. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and
washers for reuse. d. Insert the receiver pipe work onto the coil outlet and
loosely secure the receiver assembly to the side sup-
c. Remove the condenser fan. port bracket with the retained hardware.
d. Remove the infill panels to the left and right of the con- e. Braze the outlet connection to the receiver assembly.
denser fan shroud. f. Install a new filter drier.
e. Remove the condenser fan shroud. g. Replace the liquid line cushion clamps.
f. Unplug the condenser fan motor. h. Secure the receiver assembly to the side support
g. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the bracket.
motor wire harness to allow the harness to be slid i. Pressure / leak test the coil and filter drier connec-
back through the side support bracket. tions, refer to Section 6.5.

6−7 T-362
j. Evacuate the entire unit, refer to Section 6.6. 6.11 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR
k. Slide the top and bottom drain lines back into place The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed
through the side support bracket. from front of unit). The fan pulls air through the con-
denser coil, and discharges the air horizontally through
l. Using the two supplied straight connectors and con- the front of the unit.
tact adhesive reconnect the drain lines.
6.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace
m. Slide the condenser fan motor wiring harness back
through the side support bracket and refit to condens-
er motor.
WARNING
n. Replace all wire ties that were removed to properly
secure the drain line and wiring. Do not remove the condenser fan grille
o. Reseal the wire harness and drain line penetrations before turning power OFF and disconnect-
with the putty. ing the power plug.
p. Slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed
but do not secure. a. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and
washers for reuse.
q. Refit the condenser fan shroud to the unit. Use the b. Remove the condenser fan by loosening the two set
condenser fan as a guide to ensure the shroud is screws.
properly centered around the fan.
c. Disconnect the condenser fan motor wiring.
r. Remove the condenser fan, and place it on the shaft
facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the cor-
rect position, 37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see
Figure 6−7. CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over
37mm (1.5”) coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor
from falling into condenser coil.

Fan d. Note the number of shims on each side of the motor

as the same configuration will be required to refit the
new motor.
Shroud
e. Remove the fan motor mounting hardware and re-
move motor.
f. Loosely mount the new motor using new lock nuts.
g. Connect the fan motor wiring to the new fan motor.
h. Replace the shims in the same configuration as they
were removed.
i. Tighten the fan motor mounting bolts to properly se-
cure the motor.
j. To make sure that the motor is aligned properly, slide
the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but
do not secure.
k. Rotate the fan to make sure the fan blades do not con-
tact the shroud:
1. If the fan motor is misaligned vertically, add or re-
move shims to align.
2. If the fan motor is not properly centered, loosen the
Figure 6−7 Condenser Fan Position mounting bolts, and adjust the motor position on
the bracket, and then secure the motor.
s. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
l. Remove the condenser fan, and connect the fan mo-
t. Refit left and right infill panels. tor wiring to the fan motor.
u. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is m. Place the condenser fan on the shaft facing the cor-
properly centered around the condenser fan. rect direction. Adjust the fan to the correct position,
37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 6−7.
v. Evacuate the entire unit, refer to Section 6.6.
n. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
w. Recharge the unit with the charge shown on the unit o. Refit the left and right infill panels.
serial plate, refer to Section 6.7. It is important for
proper unit operation that the charge is weighed into p. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is
the unit. properly centered around condenser fan.

T-362 6−8
6.12 FILTER DRIER e. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distrib-
utor and the other at the coil header.
a. To check filter drier:
f. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (refer to
1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter drier by feeling 6.23) from the coil.
the liquid line inlet and outlet connections. If the
outlet side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the g. Remove middle coil support.
filter drier should be changed. h. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove de-
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator if the indicator frost heaters and install on replacement coil.
shows a high level of moisture, the filter drier i. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
should be replaced.
j. Leak check connections. Evacuate and add refriger-
b. To replace filter drier: ant charge.
1. Pump down the unit (refer to paragraph 6.4). Eva- 6.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement
cuate if unit is not equipped with service valves.
Then replace filter drier. The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and
if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with para- containing that heater may be disconnected at the
graph 6.6. contactor.
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in
The next Pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has
system and check charge.
been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater
should be replaced. To remove a heater, do the
6.13 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY
following:
The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil,
should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid WARNING
is fresh water or steam. Another recommended cleaner
is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s in-
structions. Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the con- (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power
denser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) supply before working on moving parts.
must be open to ensure adequate drainage.
a. Before servicing unit, make sure the circuit breakers
6.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement (CB-1 and CB-2) and start-stop switch (ST) are in the
a. Pump unit down. (Refer to paragraph 6.4). OFF position, and the power plug is disconnected.
b. Remove the upper back panel.
WARNING c. Determine which heater(s) need replacing by check-
ing resistance of each heater set. Refer to paragraph
2.3 for heater resistance values. Once the set con-
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers taining the failed heater is determined, cut the splice
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power connection and retest to determine the actual failed
supply before working on moving parts. heater(s).
b. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove d. Remove hold-down clamp securing heater(s) to coil.
the screws securing the panel covering the evaporat- e. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end
or section (upper panel). down and away from coil). Move heater to the side
c. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring. enough to clear the heater end support and remove.
d. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil. To replace a heater, do steps a through e in reverse.

Bracket

Heater Element

Retainer

Figure 6−8 Heater Arrangement

6−9 T-362
6.14 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY d. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat
washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the con- torque to 40 foot-pounds.
tainer by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or
Washer
cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the refri-
geration unit into the container. The fan motor bearings
are factory lubricated and do not require additional Fan Nut
grease.
6.14.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly

WARNING Stator
Screws,
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers Washers
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power
supply before working on moving parts.
a. Remove access panel by removing mounting bolts
and TIR locking device. Reach inside of unit and re-
move the Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Dis-
connect the connector by twisting to unlock and
pulling to separate. Protector
b. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the
underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan as-
sembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan
assembly.
c. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on Motor
a sturdy work surface.
6.14.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly
a. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes loc-
ated in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by
holding the spanner wrench stationary and turning Figure 6−9 Evaporator Fan Assembly
the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 6−9).
e. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order
b. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to
puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds). Connect the wiring con-
washers and key. nector.
c. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are loc- f. Replace access the panel making sure that the panel
ated under the fan that support the motor and stator does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device
housing. Remove the motor and plastic spacer. is lockwired.
6.14.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly
6.15 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING
a. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.
Containers and Container units that are exposed to
certain fumigants may develop visible surface
NOTE corrosion. This corrosion will show up as a white powder
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan found on the inside of the container and on the reefer
blade, care must be taken to assure that the blade unit evaporator stator and fan deck.
is not damaged. In the past, it was a common prac- Analyses by Carrier Transicold environmental
tice to insert a screwdriver between the fan blades specialists have identified the white powder as
to keep it from turning. This practice can no longer consisting predominantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum
be used, as the blade is made up of a material that oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result
of surface corrosion on the aluminum parts within the
will be damaged. It is recommended that an impact container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in
wrench be used when removing the blade. Do not thickness and eventually flake as a light−weight white
use the impact wrench when reinstalling, as galling powder.
of the stainless steel shaft can occur. The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by
b. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and
to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds). possibly other fumigants that are commonly used for
fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo
c. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan such as grapes, for example. Fumigation is the process
motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil eliminate infestations of insects, termites, rodents,
solution (such as Never-seez). weeds and soil−born disease.

T-362 6−10
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached 6.16.1 Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and
from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet Strainer
evaporator coil where it will be caught and then flushed
out of the unit during routine defrost cycles. a. Removing an EEV:

However, it is still highly recommended that after

carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that WARNING
the inside of the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to
reuse.
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power
and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent supply before working on moving parts.
(Tri−Pow’r® HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to
remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and 1. Pump down the compressor (refer to paragraph 6.4)
dislodging of the corrosive elements. and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold 2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be ordered 3. Remove coil.
through any of the PPG locations; Part Number
NU4371−88. 4. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of remov-
ing the valve is to cut the connection between the
As a general safety precaution, before using this brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cut-
product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data ter. Remove valve.
(MSDS) sheet. This document can be found at: Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat in-
www.nucalgon.com/products/coil_cleaners_tripower.htm let and outlet connections to valve body and remove
valve.
Prior to Cleaning:
5. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.
− Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
b. Installing an EEV; Reverse steps 1 through 4 above to
− Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid install a new valve.
breathing mists.
1. Install the valve and a new strainer with the cone of
− When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the strainer / screen pointing into liquid line at the inlet to
cleaner. the valve.
− ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning 2. During installation, make sure the EEV coil is
indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open). snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is prop-
erly seated in one of the valve body dimples. Also,
− Be aware of surroundings − food, plants, etc., and the ensure that coil boot is properly fitted over valve
potential for human exposure. body. See Figure 6−10.
− Always read directions and follow recommended
dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using Coil
non−diluted cleaner is not recommended. Boot
Cleaning Procedure:
Coil
a. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of
the unit. Electronic
b. Spray the surface with water before applying the Expansion
cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better. Valve
c. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts
water and 1 part cleaner).
d. Allow the cleaner to soak in for 5 to 7 minutes. FLOW
DIRECTION
e. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations re-
garding disposal of waste water.
f. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area,
floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foaming solution
is present, it is very important to take the time to thor- Strainer
oughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
g. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly
and dispose of properly. Figure 6−10 Electronic Expansion Valve
3. Replace filter drier.
6.16 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump
The electronic expansion valve (EEV) is an automatic on liquid line and suction service valve.
device which maintains required superheat of the refrig- 5. Open liquid line service valve and check refrigerant
erant gas leaving the evaporator. The valve functions level.
are: (a) automatic response of refrigerant flow to match
the evaporator load and (b) prevention of liquid refriger- 6. Check superheat. (Refer to Section 2.2).
ant entering the compressor. Unless the valve is defec- 7. Check unit operation by running Pre−trip (Refer to
tive, it seldom requires any maintenance. Section 3.8).

6−11 T-362
6.17 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE 5. Place the top coil o−ring on the coil mounting screw
and secure the coil to the valve using a torque−
wrench. Torque the screw to 25 in−lbs.
1
6. Connect coil wires using butt−splices and heat−
shrink tubing.
2

6.18 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE

3
The economizer expansion valve is an automatic device
4 that maintains constant superheat of the refrigerant gas
leaving at the point of bulb attachment, regardless of
suction pressure.
5
1. Slotted Screw Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires main-
tenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that the
2. Top Coil (small) O−ring thermal bulb is tightly secured to the suction line and
3. Solenoid Coil, Enclosing Tube and Body wrapped with insulating compound.
4. Bottom Coil (large) O−ring
5. Brass Spacer 6.18.1 Economizer Expansion Replacement

Figure 6−11 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid

Valve (ESV)
a. Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil:

WARNING Inlet

Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers

(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power
supply before working on moving parts.
1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
Disconnect leads. Outlet
2. Remove top screw and o−ring. Remove coil and
save mounting hardware, seals and spacer for re-
use. (See Figure 6−11). Refer to step d. for valve coil
replacement.
b. Removing the Solenoid Valve: Figure 6−12 Economizer Expansion Valve
1. Pump down the compressor (refer to paragraph
6.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge a. Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve:
valves.
2. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of re- NOTE
moving the solenoid valve is to cut the connection
between the brazed section and the valve, using a The economizer expansion valve is a hermetic
small tube cutter. Remove valve. valve, it does not have adjustable superheat
(See Figure 6−12).
Alternately, heat inlet and outlet connections to
valve body and remove valve.
3. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary. 1. Pump down the compressor (refer to paragraph 6.4)
and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
c. Installing the Solenoid Valve: Evacuate if unit is not equipped with service valves.
1. Fit the new solenoid valve into position and braze. Refer to paragraph 6.6.1.
Use a wet rag to keep valve cool whenever brazing.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
d. Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil:
1. Install the brass spacer on the valve stem. 3. Remove cushion clamps located on the inlet and out-
let lines.
2. Lubricate both o−rings with silicone provided in the
kit. 4. Remove insulation (Presstite) from expansion valve
3. Install bottom coil o−ring on the valve stem. bulb.

4. Install the solenoid coil on the valve stem. 5. Unstrap the bulb, located on the economizer line.

T-362 6−12
6. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of remov- 5. Loosen the nuts attaching the DUV to the top of the
ing the valve is to cut the connection between the compressor.
brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cut-
ter. Remove valve. 6. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of re-
moving the solenoid valve is to cut the connection
Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat in- between the brazed section and the valve, using a
let and outlet connections to valve body and remove small tube cutter. Remove valve. (See
valve. Figure 6−13).
7. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary. Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat
outlet connection to valve body and remove valve.
b. Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve:
1. The economizer expansion valve should be 2 3
wrapped in a soaked cloth for brazing. 1 4
2. Braze inlet connection to inlet line.
3. Braze outlet connection to outlet line.
4. Reinstall the cushion clamps on inlet and outlet
lines.
c. Replace filter drier, (Refer to Section 6.12). 6 5
d. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump on
liquid line and suction service valve.
e. Check economizer expansion valve superheat (see 1. Sleeve 4. Tube
Section 2.2). 2. O−ring (hidden) 5. Solenoid Valve
3. Screen Valve Body
6.19 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE
Strainer 6. Hex Nut, 1/2 OD
a. Removing the DUV:
Figure 6−13 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
1. Pump down the compressor (refer to paragraph Assembly
6.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge
valves. In the event the DUV is stuck open and com- 7. Examine compressor and service valves. Ensure
pressor cannot pump down, remove charge. that the o−ring is not stuck in the gland of the valve.
8. Discard the o−ring on the o−ring face seal connec-
CAUTION tion.
b. Installing the DUV:
The scroll compressor achieves low suc- 1. Lubricate the gland shoulder area and o−ring with
tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the refrigerant oil.
compressor to evacuate the system below 2. Fit new valve in position and hand−tighten the
0 psig. Never operate the compressor with o−ring nut.
the suction or discharge service valves
3. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool while brazing.
closed (frontseated). Internal damage will Braze DUV to service valve connection.
result from operating the compressor in a
deep vacuum. 4. Reinstall and tighten the brackets that secure the
valve body to the discharge line.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit. 5. Torque o−ring face seal connections to 18 to 20 ft−
lbs.
3. Loosen bolt on top of the DUV and remove coil
assembly. 6. Install the coil onto the valve body and tighten the at-
tachment bolt.
NOTE
There is a small spacer tube between the top of NOTE
the valve and the 12 VDC coil that needs to be re- Confirm that the small spacer tube is inserted
installed into the solenoid valve coil. When re- into the coil prior to attaching it to the valve
moving the coil, it may fall out when lifted from the body. The valve will not function correctly
valve body. Take care that the spacer is not lost; without it.
the valve will not function correctly without it.
7. Leak check and evacuate low side of unit as applic-
able. Refer to paragraph 6.6.1.
4. Remove clamps holding the DUV to the discharge
line. 8. Open service valves.

6−13 T-362
6.20 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS a. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an AR-
ROW key until Cd41 is displayed in the left window.
Controller function code Cd41 is a configurable code The right window will display a controller communica-
that allows timed operation of the automatic valves for tions code.
troubleshooting. Test sequences are provided in
Table 6−1. Capacity mode (CAP) allows alignment of
the economizer solenoid valve in the standard and b. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test
economized operating configurations. DUV Capacity name alternating with the test setting or time remain-
Modulation, % Setting (PCnt) and Electronic Expansion ing. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired test.
Valve (EEV) allows opening of the digital unloader valve Press the ENTER key, SELCt will appear in the left
and electronic expansion valve, respectively, to various display.
percentages. If the unit is equipped with an LIV, the
Liquid Valve Setting allows the LIV to be automatically c. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired setting,
controlled, or manually opened and closed. and then press the ENTER key. Selections available
for each of the tests are provided in Table 6−1.
The Override Timer (tIM) selection is also provided to
enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which
the override(s) are active. If the timer is active, valve d. If the timer is not operating, follow the above proce-
override selections will take place immediately. If the dure to display the timer. Use an ARROW key to scroll
timer is not active, changes will not take place for a few to the desired time interval and press ENTER to start
seconds after the timer is started. When the timer times the timer.
out, the override function is automatically terminated
and the valves return to normal machinery control. To e. The above described sequence may be repeated
operate the override: during the timer cycle to change to another override.

Table 6−1 Valve Override Control Displays

Left Display Controller Communications Codes Setting Codes (Right Display)
(Right Display)
Cd 41/SELCt tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
(Override Timer) In 30 second increments to
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)
PCnt AUtO
(% Setting − DUV Capacity Modulation) (Normal Machinery Control)
0
3
6
10
25
50
100
EEV AUtO
(% Setting − Electronic Expansion Valve) (Normal Machinery Control)
CLOSE (Closed)
0
3
6
10
25
50
100
CAP AUtO
(Capacity Mode) (Normal Control)
Std
UnLd
(Economizer = Closed)
ECOn
(Economizer = Open)

T-362 6−14
6.21 AUTOTRANSFORMER The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be
followed when handling the modules. These precau-
tions and procedures should be implemented when
If the unit does not start, check the following: replacing a module, when doing any arc welding on the
unit, or when service to the refrigeration unit requires
a. Make sure the 460 VAC (yellow) power cable is handling and removal of a module.
plugged into the receptacle (see Figure 6−14) and
locked in place. a. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold
P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat (Carri-
er Transicold P/N 07-00277-00). The wrist strap,
b. Make sure that circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in when properly grounded, will dissipate any potential
the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in,
static buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will
check voltage supply.
provide a static-free work surface on which to place
and/or service the modules.
c. There is no internal protector for this transformer
design, therefore, no checking of the internal protec- b. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
tor is required. c. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any
exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration
d. Using a voltmeter, and with the primary supply circuit unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460 VAC). Next,
check the secondary (output) voltage (230 VAC). The d. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any of the
transformer is defective if output voltage is not avail- electrical connections if possible. Place the module
able. on the static mat.
e. The strap should be worn during any service work on
a module, even when it is placed on the mat.
6.22.2 Controller Troubleshooting
2 3 A group of test points (TP, see Figure 6−15) are
provided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical
circuits (see schematic diagram, section 7). A
description of the test points follows:
1
NOTE
Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC voltage
between TP’s and ground (TP9), except for TP8.

TP 1 − Not used in this application.

TP 2 − Enables the user to check if the high pressure

switch (HPS) is open or closed.
1. Dual Voltage Modular Autotransformer
TP 3 − Enables the user to check if the water pressure
2. Circuit Breaker (CB−2) 230−Volt switch (WP) contact is open or closed.
3. 460 VAC Power Receptacle
Figure 6−14 Autotransformer TP 4 − Enables the user to check if the internal protector
for the condenser fan motor (IP-CM) is open or closed.

6.22 CONTROLLER TP 5 − Enables the user to check if the internal protec-

tors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or IP-EM2)
6.22.1 Handling Modules are open or closed.

CAUTION TP 6 (IF EQUIPPED) − Enables the user to check if the

controller liquid injection valve relay (TQ) is open or
closed.
Do not remove wire harnesses from module
unless you are grounded to the unit frame TP 7 − Enables the user to check if the controller econo-
with a static safe wrist strap. mizer solenoid valve relay (TS) is open or closed.

TP 8 − Not used in this application.

CAUTION
TP 9 − The chassis (unit frame) ground connection.
Unplug all module connectors before
performing arc welding on any part of the TP 10 − Enables the user to check if the heat termination
container. thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.

6−15 T-362
 4. The display will alternate to between PrESS EntR
3 and rEV XXXX.
2
1 5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This
message will last for up to one minute.
7. The display module will go blank briefly, then read
“Pro donE” when the software loading has loaded. (If
a problem occurs while loading the software: the dis-
4 play will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.”
Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
8. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).
9. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/
software port and return the unit to normal operation
by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
10.Turn power on and wait about 15 seconds for the
new software to load into the controller memory. The
status LED will flash quickly and the display will re-
main blank as the controller loads the new software.
When complete, the controller will reset and power
1. Controller Software Programming Port up normally.
2. Mounting Screw 11. Wait for default display, setpoint on the left, and con-
3. Controller trol temperature on the right.
4. Test Points 12.Confirm software is correct using keypad code se-
Figure 6−15 Controller Section of the Control Box lect 18 to view Cd18 XXXX.
13.Turn power off. Operational software is loaded.
6.22.3 Controller Programming Procedure b. Procedure for loading Configuration Software:
1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
CAUTION 2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card contain-
ing the following (example) files into the program-
The unit must be OFF whenever a program- ming/software port. (See Figure 6−15):
ming card is inserted or removed from the menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select
controller programming port. the file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
1. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST). 3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST).
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card contain- 4. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads
ing the following (example) files into the program- Set UP.
ming/software port. (See Figure 6−15): 5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a 6. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads
file/program to upload into the controller. XXXX the message ruN COnFG. (If a defective card
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file. is being used the display will blink the message “bAd
CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the
3. Turn unit ON, via start-stop switch (ST). card.)
6.22.3.1 Programming Procedure for Software Ver- 7. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
sions 5354 and Greater & With Updated 8. The display module will go blank briefly and then dis-
Menu Option (menu0115.ml) play “551 00”, based on the operational software
installed.
NOTE 9. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll
Units must be loaded with software version through the list to obtain the proper model dash num-
5354 or higher. See the label in the control box ber. (If a defective card is being used, the display will
blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop
door for factory installed software version.
switch OFF and remove the card.)
10.Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
The updated menu option allows the operational soft-
ware to be loaded, and time and container identification 11. When software loading has successfully completed,
to be set. the display will show the message “EEPrM donE.” (If
a problem occurs while loading the software, the dis-
a. Procedure for loading Operational Software: play will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.”
1. The display module will display the message Set UP. Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
12.Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
2. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until the display
reads, LOAd 53XX for Scroll. 13.Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/
software port and return the unit to normal operation
3. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.

T-362 6−16
14.Confirm correct model configuration using the key- b. Installation:
pad to choose code 20 (CD20). The model displayed
should match the unit serial number plate. Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
c. Procedure for setting the date and time: Torque values for mounting screws (item 2, see
Figure 6−15) are 0.23 mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque
1. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads value for the connectors is 0.12 mkg (10 inch-pounds).
Set TIM.
2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. 6.22.5 Battery Replacement
3. The first value to be modified is the date in YYYY Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):
MM−DD format. The values will be entered from right a. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
to left. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to in-
crease or decrease the values. The ENTER key will b. Slide bracket out and remove old batteries. (See
enter the information for the current field and move to Figure 3−4, Item 8.)
the next value; the CODE SELECT key will allow
modification of the previous value. c. Install new batteries and slide bracket into control box
slot.
4. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
5. The next value to be modified is the time in HH MM
format. The values will be entered from right to left.
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to increase or
CAUTION
decrease the values. The ENTER key will enter the Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid
information for the current field and move to the next
value; the CODE SELECT key will allow modification nicking or cutting wires.
of the previous value.
6. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. The date and Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells):
time will not be committed until start up procedures a. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
are completed on the next power up.
b. Disconnect battery wire connector from control box.
d. Procedure for setting the container ID:
c. Slide out and remove old battery and bracket. (See
NOTE Figure 3−4, Item 8.)
The characters will be preset to the container ID d. Slide new battery pack and bracket into the control
already on the controller. If none exist, the de- box slot.
fault will be AAAA0000000. e. Reconnect battery wire connector to control box and
replace wire ties that were removed.
1. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads
Set ID. Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only):
2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. a. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
3. Values will be entered from right to left. Press the UP b. Open control box door and remove both the high volt-
or DOWN ARROW key to increase or decrease the age shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).
values. ENTER will enter the information for the cur-
rent field and move to the next value; CODE c. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug posi-
SELECT will allow modification of the previous tions 14, 13, 11.
value. d. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number
4. When the last value is entered, press the ENTER 07−00418−00, remove the 4 screws securing the dis-
key to enter the information to the controller; the play module to the control box. Disconnect the ribbon
CODE SELECT key will allow modification of the cable and set the display module aside.
previous value.
NOTE
6.22.4 Removing and Installing a Controller
The battery wires must face toward the right.
a. Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and e. Remove the old battery from the bracket and clean
move wiring out of way. bracket surface. Remove the protective backing from
the new battery and assemble to the bracket. Secure
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted, loosen the battery by inserting the wire tie from the back of the
top mounting screw (see Figure 6−15) and lift up and bracket around the battery, and back through the
out. bracket.
3. Disconnect the back connectors and remove f. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and re−install
module. the display.
4. When removing the replacement module from its g. Route the battery wires from the battery along the dis-
packaging , note how it is packaged. When returning play harness and connect the red battery wire and
the old module for service, place it in the packaging one end of the red jumper to “KA14,” the other end of
in the same manner as the replacement. The pack- the red jumper wire to “KA11,” and the black wire to
aging has been designed to protect the module from “KA13.”
both physical and electrostatic discharge damage
during storage and transit. h. Replace wire ties that were removed.

6−17 T-362
6.23 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE b. Start unit and check sensor reading on the control
panel. The reading should be 0C (32F). If the read-
ing is correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not, continue with
Service procedures for the return recorder, return tem- the following.
perature, supply recorder, supply temperature, ambi-
ent, defrost temperature, evaporator temperature, and c. Turn unit OFF and disconnect power supply.
compressor discharge temperature sensors are pro- d. Refer to paragraph 6.22 and remove controller to gain
vided in the following sub paragraphs. access to the sensor plugs.
e. Using the plug connector marked “EC” that is con-
6.23.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure nected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor
wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, or CPDS
To verify that accuracy of a temperature sensor: as required). Follow those wires to the connector and
using the pins of the plug, measure the resistance.
Values are provided in Table 6−2 and Table 6−3.
a. Remove the sensor and place in a 0C (32F)
ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is prepared by Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters,
filling an insulated container (of sufficient size to thermometers or other test equipment, a reading
completely immerse bulb) with ice cubes or chipped within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good
ice, then filling voids between ice with water and sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance read-
agitating until mixture reaches 0C (32F) measured ing will usually be much higher or lower than the resis-
on a laboratory thermometer. tance values given.
Table 6−2 Sensor Resistance
Sensors AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS
5C °F Ohms 5C °F Ohms 5C °F Ohms 5C °F Ohms
−40 −40 336,500 −7.8 18 49,060 24.4 76 10,250 56.7 134 2,809
−38.9 −38 312,600 −6.7 20 46,230 25.6 78 9,760 57.8 136 2,697
−37.8 −36 290,600 −5.6 22 43,580 26.7 80 9,299 58.9 138 2,590
−36.7 −34 270,300 −4.4 24 41,100 27.8 82 8,862 60.0 140 2,488
−35.6 −32 251,500 −3.3 26 38,780 28.9 84 8,449 61.1 142 2,390
−34.4 −30 234,200 −2.2 28 36,600 30.0 86 8,057 62.2 144 2,297
−33.3 −28 218,200 −1.1 30 34,560 31.1 88 7,686 63.3 146 2,208
−32.2 −26 203,400 0 32 32,650 32.2 90 7,334 64.4 148 2,124
−31.1 −24 189,700 1.1 34 30,850 33.3 92 7,000 65.6 150 2,042
−30 −22 177,000 2.2 36 29,170 34.4 94 6,684 68.3 155 1,855
−28.9 −20 165,200 3.3 38 27,590 35.6 96 6,384 71.1 160 1,687
−27.8 −18 154,300 4.4 40 26,100 36.7 98 6,099 73.9 165 1,537
−26.7 −16 144,200 5.5 42 24,700 37.8 100 5,828 76.7 170 1,402
−25.6 −14 134,800 6.6 44 23,390 38.9 102 5,571 79.4 175 1,281
−24.4 −12 126,100 7.7 46 22,160 40.0 104 5,327 82.2 180 1,171
−23.3 −10 118,100 8.9 48 20,990 41.1 106 5,095 85.0 185 1,072
−22.2 −8 110,500 10 50 19,900 42.2 108 4,874 87.8 190 983
−21.1 −6 103,600 11.1 52 18,870 43.3 110 4,665 90.6 195 902
−20 −4 97,070 12.2 54 17,900 44.4 112 4,465 93.3 200 829
−18.9 −2 91,030 13.3 56 16,980 45.5 114 4,275 96.1 205 762
−17.8 0 85,400 14.4 58 16,120 46.7 116 4,095 98.9 210 702
−16.7 2 80,160 15.5 60 15,310 47.8 118 3,923 101.7 215 647
−15.6 4 75,270 16.6 62 14,540 48.9 120 3,759 104.4 220 598
−14.4 6 70,720 17.7 64 13,820 50.0 122 3,603 107.2 225 553
−13.3 8 66,460 18.9 66 13,130 51.1 124 3,454 110.0 230 511
−12.2 10 62,500 20.0 68 12,490 52.2 126 3,313 112.8 235 473
−11.1 12 58,790 21.1 70 11,880 53.3 128 3,177 115.6 240 438
−10.0 14 55,330 22.2 72 11,310 54.4 130 3,049 118.3 245 406
−8.9 16 52,090 23.3 74 10,760 55.6 132 2,926 121.1 250 378

T-362 6−18
 Table 6−3 Sensor Resistance (CPDS)
5C °F Ohms 5C °F Ohms 5C °F Ohms
*40 *40 2,889,600 38 100.4 49,656 116 240.8 3,759
*38 *36.4 2,532,872 40 104.0 45,812 118 244.4 3,550
*36 *32.8 2,225,078 42 107.6 42,294 120 248.0 3,354
*34 *29.2 1,957,446 44 111.2 39,078 122 251.6 3,173
*32 *25.6 1,724,386 46 114.8 36,145 124 255.2 3,004
*30 *22.0 1,522,200 48 118.4 33,445 126 258.8 2,850
*28 *18.4 1,345,074 50 122.0 30,985 128 262.4 2,711
*26 *14.8 1,190,945 52 125.6 28,724 130 266.0 2,580
*24 *11.2 1,056,140 54 129.2 26,651 132 269.6 2,454
*22 *7.6 938,045 56 132.8 27,750 134 273.2 2,335
*20 *4.0 834,716 58 136.4 23,005 136 276.8 2,223
*18 *0.4 743,581 60 140.0 21,396 138 280.4 2,119
*16 3.2 663,593 62 143.6 19,909 140 284.0 2,021
*14 6.8 593,030 64 147.2 18,550 142 287.6 1,928
*12 10.4 530,714 66 150.8 17,294 144 291.2 1,839
*10 14.0 475,743 68 154.4 16,133 146 294.8 1,753
*8 17.6 426,904 70 158.0 15,067 148 298.4 1,670
*6 21.2 383,706 72 161.6 14,078 150 302.0 1,591
*4 24.8 345,315 74 165.2 13,158 152 305.6 1,508
*2 28.4 311,165 76 168.8 12,306 154 309.2 1,430
0 32.0 280,824 78 172.4 11,524 156 312.8 1,362
2 35.6 253,682 80 176.0 10,793 158 316.4 1,302
4 39.2 229,499 82 179.6 10,122 160 320.0 1,247
6 42.8 207,870 84 183.2 9,494 162 323.6 1,193
8 46.4 188,494 86 186.8 8,918 164 327.2 1,142
10 50.0 171,165 88 190.4 8,376 166 330.8 1,096
12 53.6 155,574 90 194.0 7,869 168 334.4 1,054
14 57.2 141,590 92 197.6 7,404 170 338.0 1,014
16 60.8 129,000 94 201.2 6,972 172 341.6 975
18 64.4 117,656 96 204.8 6,571 174 345.2 938
20 68.0 107,439 98 208.4 6,197 176 348.8 902
22 71.6 98,194 100 212.0 5,848 178 352.4 867
24 75.2 89,916 102 215.6 5,529 180 356.0 834
26 78.8 82,310 104 219.2 5,233 182 359.6 798
28 82.4 75,473 106 222.8 4,953 184 363.2 764
30 83.0 69,281 108 226.4 4,692 186 366.8 733
32 89.6 63,648 110 230.0 4,446 188 370.4 706
34 93.2 58,531 112 233.6 4,204 190 374.0 697
36 96.8 53,887 114 237.2 3,977

6−19 T-362
6.23.2 Sensor Replacement 2

WARNING
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breaker
(CB-1) and disconnect main power supply
before removing electrical parts.
1 3 4
a. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
NOTE 1. Cable 4. Heat Shrink
2. Sensor (Typical) Tubing, 2 or 3
Include white date code label when cutting out
3. Large Heat Shrink as required
and removing defective sensors. The label
Tubing (1)
could be required for warranty returns.
Figure 6−17 Sensor and Cable Splice
b. Cut cable. Slide the cap and grommet off a bulb type g. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto
sensor and save for reuse. Do not cut the grommet. the replacement sensor.
h. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire
c. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into
shorter than the other wire. crimp fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimp-
ing tool.
d. Cut replacement sensor wires (opposite colors) back
40 mm (1-1/2 inches). (See Figure 6−16.) i. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead
Rosincore solder.
e. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4 inch). j. Slide heat shrink tubing over each splice so that ends
of tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in
Figure 6−17.
1 k. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all seams
2
are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent mois-
ture seepage.

3
CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice
Mounting Stud Type area as this may affect sensor resistance.

l. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and

1 2 shrink.
m. Position sensor in unit as shown in Figure 6−17 and
re-check sensor resistance.:
Figure 6−16 − Return Sensor Positioning
3 Figure 6−18 − Supply Sensor Positioning
Bulb Type Figure 6−20 − ETS Sensor Positioning
n. Reinstall sensor, refer to:
1. Sensor
2. 40 mm (1 1/2 in), 2 or 3 wires as required 6.23.3 − For STS and SRS Re-Installation
3. 6.3 mm (1/4 in). 6.23.4 − For RRS and RTS Re-Installation
6.23.5 − For DTS Re-Installation
Figure 6−16 Sensor Types
6.23.6 − For ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation
f. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the
cable, and place the two small pieces of heat shrink NOTE
tubing, one over each wire, before adding crimp fit- The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to deactivate
tings as shown in Figure 6−17. probe alarms (refer to paragraph 4.8).

T-362 6−20
6.23.3 Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation

To properly position a unit supply sensor (Supply Tem-

perature Sensor STS or Supply Recorder Sensor SRS),
the sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder.
This positioning will give the sensor the optimum
amount of exposure to the supply air stream, and will al-
low the Controller to operate correctly. Insufficient probe
insertion into the probe holder will result in poor temper-
ature control due to the lack of air flow over the sensor.
Mounting Return
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does not Clamp Sensor 1.50 in.
contact the back panel. The design minimum clearance (38.1cm)
of 6 mm (1/4 inch) should be maintained (see
Figure 6−18).
Figure 6−19 Return Sensor Positioning

6.23.5 Sensor DTS Re-Installation

Sensor
Wires Cap and Grommet The Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) must have in-
Assembly sulating material placed completely over the sensor to
ensure the coil metal temperature is sensed.
Evaporator
Back Panel 6.23.6 Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation

The Evaporator Temperature Sensors, ETS1 and ETS2

Probe are located in a tube holder under insulation, as illus-
Holder trated in Figure 6−20. When the combo sensor is re-
moved and reinstalled, it must be placed in a tube holder
by applying thermal grease. Insulating material must
Supply completely cover the sensor to ensure the correct tem-
Air perature is sensed.
Stream

Supply Sensor 1

6 mm
(1/4 inch)

Figure 6−18 Supply Sensor Positioning 3 1.00 in.

2 (25.4cm)
6.23.4 Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation
1. Wire Tie 3. ETS Tube Holder
Reinstall the return sensor (Return Temperature Sensor 2. ETS1 and ETS 2 4. Insulation
RTS or Return Recorder Sensor RRS), as shown in
Figure 6−19. For proper placement of the return sensor,
be sure to position the enlarged positioning section of Figure 6−20 Evaporator Temperature Sensor
the sensor against the the side of the mounting clamp. Positioning

6−21 T-362
6.23.7 Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation 4. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with the
replacement sensor around the sensor sealing ring.
Insert sensor into the well with the leads parallel to
To replace the Compressor Discharge Temperature the suction fitting.
Sensor, see Figure 6−21:
5. Reconnect the sensor (see Figure 6−17) and run
Pre−trip P5.
1. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that ST is in OFF position. 6.24 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS)

2. Remove the existing sensor. Clean all silicone sealer The vent position sensor (VPS) determines the position
and dielectric compound from the sensor well. En- of the fresh air vent in near real-time via the Cd55.
sure well is clean and dry. The top of the compressor,
where the sensor seals, must also be clean and dry. The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL50) will oc-
cur if the sensor reading is not stable for four minutes or
if the sensor is outside of its valid range (shorted or
open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is
defective. To confirm a defective panel, assure that the
SENSOR wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit. If the
alarm immediately reappears as active, the panel
should be replaced.

The alarm should immediately go inactive, check the

SILICONE BEAD 4-minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs af-
ter the four minutes and the panel was known to have
been stable, then the sensor should be replaced.

Upper VPS:

In order to replace the Upper VPS, the panel must be re-

moved and replaced with another upper fresh air panel
equipped with VPS.

Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires calibra-

tion as follows:

SENSOR WELL 1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH/ CFM position.

2. Cd45 will automatically display. Press the Enter key

and hold for five seconds.

Figure 6−21 Compressor Discharge Temperature 3. After the enter key has been pressed the display will
Sensor read CAL (for calibration).

4. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five seconds.
3. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement
sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound into 5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will
the sensor well. display 0 CMH / CFM.

T-362 6−22
6.25 eAutoFresh SERVICE
Stepper Drive (SD) Stepper Motor (AF)
6.25.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter

Removing the Air Sample Filter Element

The air sample filter element can be accessed in two

ways:

1. Through the eAutoFresh side evaporator access

panel.
Figure 6−22 Stepper Components
2. Through the inside of the container by lowering the d. Set the SMA−12 pulse per second (PPS) to one PPS
upper evaporator panel. and press button to open or close the valve. Each
LED should light sequentially until all four are lit. If an
a. By hand, unscrew and remove the filter cup from the LED fails to light, it indicates an open on that leg
bottom of the air sample filter assembly. caused by a poor connection or an open coil. Repair
or replace as required to achieve proper operation.
b. Remove the filter element from the filter assembly.
e. Set the SMA−12 step rate to 200 PPS. Press open or
close while watching the slide mechanism for move-
c. Install the new air sample filter element by reversing ment, this is an indication that the motor is working.
the above steps.
f. If the slide moves using the SMA−12, but fails to
6.25.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System move when connected in the unit (refer to “Checking
the Drive Module” in the section that follows.)
Checking the Auto Slide: Checking the Drive Module:
a. To check with an ohmmeter, disconnect the four pin a. Turn unit OFF.
connector to the stepper motor. With a reliable digital b. Disconnect the four pin connector to the Stepper Mo-
ohmmeter, check the winding resistance. In normal tor.
ambient, the motor should have 72 to 84 ohms meas-
ured on the red/green (a−b terminals) and on the c. With a voltmeter set to read 24 volts AC, attach the
white/black (c−d terminals) leads. If an infinite or zero positive lead to the drive module outlet pin A (wire 1A)
reading occurs, check connections or replace the mo- of the four pin connector and the negative lead to the
tor. If near normal or normal reading occurs, proceed B pin (wire 1B).
to the following sections to check out the controller. d. Turn ON unit, and watch the volt meter. After a short
delay, the reading should rise to approximately 12
b. To check with a SMA−12 portable stepper drive test- volts.
er. The SMA−12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier e. Repeat for pins C and D (wires 2A and 2B).
Transicold P/N 07−00375−00) is a battery operated
stepper drive which will open and close the auto slide, f. If only one set of pins reads a voltage, check connec-
which allows a more thorough check of the motor. tions and retest.
g. If the retest reads out the same, the drive module or
Checking the Slide Motor: controller is faulty.
a. Turn unit OFF. h. If no voltage is present in any step, the output from the
controller to the drive module may be faulty. Check
b. Disconnect the four pin connector from the Stepper the connections and wires from the controller to the
Drive to the Stepper Motor, (see Figure 6−22). drive module.
i. To replace the drive module, disconnect all connect-
c. Attach the SMA−12 portable stepper drive tester to ors, unscrew from mounting, and replace with a NEW
the Stepper Motor. drive module in reverse order.

6−23 T-362
6.25.3 Checking the Controller There should be approximately five volts DC on sockets
“C” and “D” (S1 and S2) when measured as above. If not
a. Turn the unit OFF.
the connections or controller is faulty. If any of these pins
b. Disconnect the six pin connector to the stepper drive are not consistent, the connections or the controller is
from the controller. suspect. Check and replace as required.
c. With a voltmeter set to read 50 volts DC, attach the
positive lead to outlet pin A of the six pin connector, 6.25.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System
and the negative lead to pin B or TP−9 of the control-
ler. To replace the Drive Motor Assembly:
d. Turn ON the unit for 40 seconds, and watch the volt-
meter. There should be approximately 24 to 32 VDC a. Remove the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel
shown on pin A. (3, Figure 6−24) to the front of the unit. Reach in, cut
tie wrap, (2) and disconnect the motor connector (1).
e. There should be zero volts on pin B. Bring panel to work area.
f. After a short delay, the reading should rise to approx-
imately 24 to 32 VDC on pin E. b. Remove four screws (8) fastening the grille (7).
g. Pins C and D will have zero to 5 volts transistor logic
(TTL) signals present, however, this can only be c. Remove six screws (9) fastening the rails (5 and 11),
checked with the connector assembled as this is an the slide plate (10) and the gasket plate (6). Set com-
open collector type circuit. ponents aside for reassembly.
Checking the outputs on A, B and E will verify that the
controller is supplying power to the drive module. To be d. Remove the four screws (12) fastening the motor cup
thorough, and if it is desired, the signals on pins C and D (4) to the panel. Cut sealer on outside and inside of
can be checked as follows: motor cup assembly. Push out the motor cup as-
sembly from the rear of the panel.
h. Install a jumper assembly (Carrier part number
07−00408−00) to connect the drive module and con- e. Mount the replacement motor cup assembly in the
troller connectors as shown in Figure 6−23. panel using original screws. Torque screws to 0.29
i. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to test con- mkg (25 +/− 1 Inch pounds).
nector socket C and negative lead to socket B, and
run as before by resetting unit. f. Reapply sealer to the inside and the outside of the
motor cup assembly.
j. Repeat for sockets D and B.
g. Mount the upper & lower rails, slide plate and gasket
Controller Drive Module plate using original hardware. Apply thread sealant
Connector (EC) Connector (SD) and torque screws to 0.29 mkg (25 +/− 1 Inch
pounds).
A
B h. Mount grille assembly using original hardware. Apply
C A thread sealant and torque screws to 0.29 mkg (25 +/−
B 1 Inch pounds).
D
E C
D i. Reconnect the motor connector.
E
Test j. Replace the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel
Connector Jumper to the front of the unit.

Figure 6−23 Jumper Assembly k. Carry out functional test. Refer to section 4.4.3 step c.

T-362 6−24
 1 2

5 6 7 8
3

12
1
11 10 9

1. Connector 7. Grille
2. Tie Wrap 8. Grill Screws
3. eAutoFresh Panel 9. Rail Screws
4. Cup, Motor 10. Plate, Slide
5. Rail, Top 11. Rail, Bottom
6. Plate, Gasket 12. Motor Cup Screws
Figure 6−24 Motor Cup Replacement

6−25 T-362
6.26 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES sioned, a provision wiring kit (Carrier Transicold part
number 76-00685-00) must be installed. Installation in-
The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint
system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it structions are packaged with the kit.
normally operates. However, should the paint system To install the module:
be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to
protect the refrigeration unit from the highly corrosive
sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is
scratched or damaged, clean the area to bare metal WARNING
using a wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning
method. Immediately following cleaning, apply paint to Installation requires wiring to the main unit
the area, and allow to dry. Refer to the Parts List for circuit breaker, CB1. Make sure the power to
proper paint selection.
the unit is off and power plug disconnected
6.27 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE before beginning installation.
INSTALLATION
a. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wiring
schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND
that the unit power plug is disconnected.
b. Open control box, (see Figure 6−25) and remove
low voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.
c. If using factory provisioned wiring, remove the cir-
cuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from the
control box. Locate, wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5
and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire
harness. Remove the protective heat shrink from
the ends of the wires.
d. Refit the circuit breaker panel.
CB1 Communications e. Fit the new CIM into the unit.
Interface Module
f. Attach three wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and
Figure 6−25 Communications Interface CB23/CIA7 to the CIM at connection CIA.
Installation
g. Locate connectors CIA and CIB, remove plugs if re-
Units that have been factory provisioned for installation
quired, and attach to the module.
of a Communication Interface Module (CIM) have the
required wiring installed. If the unit is not factory provi- h. Replace the low voltage shield.

T-362 6−26
 Table 6−4 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart
Temperature Vacuum Temperature Pressure
F C “/hg cm/hg kg/cm2 bar F C psig kPa kg/cm2 bar
-40 -40 14.6 49.4 37.08 0.49 28 -2 24.5 168.9 1.72 1.69
-35 -37 12.3 41.6 31.25 0.42 30 -1 26.1 180.0 1.84 1.80
-30 -34 9.7 32.8 24.64 0.33 32 0 27.8 191.7 1.95 1.92
-25 -32 6.7 22.7 17.00 0.23 34 1 29.6 204.1 2.08 2.04
-20 -29 3.5 11.9 8.89 0.12 36 2 31.3 215.8 2.20 2.16

-18 -28 2.1 7.1 5.33 0.07 38 3 33.2 228.9 2.33 2.29
40 4 35.1 242.0 2.47 2.42
-16 -27 0.6 2.0 1.52 0.02
45 7 40.1 276.5 2.82 2.76
Temperature Pressure
50 10 45.5 313.7 3.20 3.14
F C psig kPa kg/cm2 bar
55 13 51.2 353.0 3.60 3.53
-14 -26 0.4 1.1 0.03 0.03
60 16 57.4 395.8 4.04 3.96
-12 -24 1.2 8.3 0.08 0.08
65 18 64.1 441.0 4.51 4.42
-10 -23 2.0 13.8 0.14 0.14
70 21 71.1 490.2 5.00 4.90
-8 -22 2.9 20.0 0.20 0.20
75 24 78.7 542.6 5.53 5.43
-6 -21 3.7 25.5 0.26 0.26
80 27 86.7 597.8 6.10 5.98
-4 -20 4.6 31.7 0.32 0.32
85 29 95.3 657.1 6.70 6.57
-2 -19 5.6 36.6 0.39 0.39
90 32 104.3 719.1 7.33 7.19
0 -18 6.5 44.8 0.46 0.45
95 35 114.0 786.0 8.01 7.86
2 -17 7.6 52.4 0.53 0.52
100 38 124.2 856.4 8.73 8.56
4 -16 8.6 59.3 0.60 0.59
105 41 135.0 930.8 9.49 9.31
6 -14 9.7 66.9 0.68 0.67
110 43 146.4 1009 10.29 10.09
8 -13 10.8 74.5 0.76 0.74
115 46 158.4 1092 11.14 10.92
10 -12 12.0 82.7 0.84 0.83
120 49 171.2 1180 12.04 11.80
12 -11 13.2 91.0 0.93 0.91
125 52 184.6 1273 12.98 12.73
14 -10 14.5 100.0 1.02 1.00
130 54 198.7 1370 13.97 13.70
16 -9 15.8 108.9 1.11 1.09
135 57 213.6 1473 15.02 14.73
18 -8 17.1 117.9 1.20 1.18
140 60 229.2 1580 16.11 15.80
20 -7 18.5 127.6 1.30 1.28
145 63 245.6 1693 17.27 16.93
22 -6 19.9 137.2 1.40 1.37
150 66 262.9 1813 18.48 18.13
24 -4 21.4 147.6 1.50 1.48
155 68 281.1 1938 19.76 19.37
26 -3 22.9 157.9 1.61 1.58

6−27 T-362
 Table 6−5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values

BOLT DIA. THREADS TORQUE Nm

FREE SPINNING
#4 40 5.2 in-lbs 0.6
#6 32 9.6 in-lbs 1.1
#8 32 20 in-lbs 2.0
#10 24 23 in-lbs 2.5
1/4 20 75 in-lbs 8.4
5/16 18 11 ft-lbs 15
3/8 16 20 ft-lbs 28
7/16 14 31 ft-lbs 42
1/2 13 43 ft-lbs 59
9/16 12 57 ft-lbs 78
5/8 11 92 ft-lbs 127
3/4 10 124 ft-lbs 171

NONFREE SPINNING (LOCKNUTS ETC.)

1/4 20 82.5 in-lbs 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 in-lbs 16.4
3/8 16 22.0 ft-lbs 23
7/16 14 34.1 ft-lbs 47
1/2 13 47.3 ft-lbs 65
9/16 12 62.7 ft-lbs 86
5/8 11 101.2 ft-lbs 139
3/4 10 136.4 ft-lbs 188

T-362 6−28
 SECTION 7

ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATICS

7.1 INTRODUCTION

This section contains the Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams.

LEGEND

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (C−23) HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (F−23)
C CONTROLLER (L−21) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (E−15)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER − 460 VOLT (J−1) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (T−23)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER − DVM (OPTION) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (T−24)
(D−1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (E−14, F−11, G−14)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (N−8, L−11)
IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (K−15)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (L−10, P−1)
PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K−9, L−8, N−1)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(A−4) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K−8, L−9, N−3)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (L−12) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (M−24, N−24, P−24)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (E−11, G−11, R−9) PTC PTC FOR VENT POSITIONING SENSOR (N−17)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (T−4) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
(K−7, L−7, K−12, L−12, K−15, L−15)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A−23)
RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (C−23)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (M−2)
RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B−23)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER − BOTTOM LEFT (R−8)
SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H−23)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER − BOTTOM RIGHT (T−7)
SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (L−23)
DHML DEFROST HEATER − MIDDLE LEFT (R−7)
ST START − STOP SWITCH (K−5)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER − MIDDLE RIGHT (T−7)
STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A−23)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER − TOP LEFT (R−7)
TC CONTROLLER RELAY−COOLING (J−9)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER − TOP RIGHT (T−8)
TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (L−7) (OPTION) (D−6)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (K−23) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY − PHASE SEQUENCING
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (C−23) (J−8, J−9)
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (F−24) TE CONTROLLER RELAY − HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (D−1) FANS (J−14)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY − HEATING (J−15)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (F−3)
TF CONTROLLER RELAY − DEFROST (E−7)
EEV ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (R−16)
TI IN−RANGE RELAY (J−15)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR−HIGH SPEED
(N−11, K−13) TL CONTROLLER RELAY − COOL LIGHT (J−12)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (T−11, T−13, E−14, F−14, TN CONTROLLER RELAY − CONDENSER FAN (J−11)
G−14)
TP TEST POINT (H−9, F−10, H−11, G−12, H−13,
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H−23) G−15, L−17)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR−LOW SPEED TR TRANSFORMER (M−3)
(P−10, L−13)
TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (D−3)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION)
(D−23) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (E−7)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (J−11) TS CONTROLLER RELAY − ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
VALVE (E−10)
F FUSE (C−7, D−7, F−21, G−21)
TV CONTROLLER RELAY − LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS FANS (J−13)
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (G−9) VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (N−17)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (N−7, L−15) WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (J−12)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (E−12)

Figure 7−1 LEGEND − Standard Unit Configuration

7−1 T-362
 Based on Drawing 62−11737
Figure 7−2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

T-362 7−2
 Based on Drawing 62−11737

Figure 7−3 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 1 of 2)

7−3 T-362
 Based on Drawing 62−11737

Figure 7−6 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 2 of 2)

T-362 7−4
 LEGEND

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (C−23) HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (F−23)
C CONTROLLER (L−21) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (E−15)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER − 460 VOLT (J−1) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (T−23)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER − DVM (OPTION) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (T−24)
(D−1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (E−14, F−11, G−14)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (N−8, L−11)
IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (K−15)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (L−10, P−1)
PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K−9, L−8, N−1)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(A−4) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K−8, L−9, N−3)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (L−12) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (M−24, N−24, P−24)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (E−11, G−11, R−9) PTC PTC FOR VENT POSITIONING SENSOR (N−17)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (T−4) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
(K−7, L−7, K−12, L−12, K−15, L−15)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A−23)
RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (C−23)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (M−2)
RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B−23)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER − BOTTOM LEFT (R−8)
SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H−23)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER − BOTTOM RIGHT (T−7)
SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (L−23)
DHML DEFROST HEATER − MIDDLE LEFT (R−7)
ST START − STOP SWITCH (K−5)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER − MIDDLE RIGHT (T−7)
STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A−23)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER − TOP LEFT (R−7)
TBU TRANSFORMER BRIDGING UNIT (D−1, D−2)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER − TOP RIGHT (T−8)
TC CONTROLLER RELAY−COOLING (J−9)
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (L−7)
TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (K−23) (OPTION) (D−6)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (C−23) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY − PHASE SEQUENCING
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (F−24) (J−8, J−9)
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (D−1) TE CONTROLLER RELAY − HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
FANS (J−14)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (F−3)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY − HEATING (J−15)
EEV ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (R−16)
TF CONTROLLER RELAY − DEFROST (E−7)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR−HIGH SPEED
(N−11, K−13) TI IN−RANGE RELAY (J−15)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (T−11, T−13, E−14, F−14, TL CONTROLLER RELAY − COOL LIGHT (J−12)
G−14)
TN CONTROLLER RELAY − CONDENSER FAN (J−11)
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H−23)
TP TEST POINT (H−9, F−10, H−11, G−12, H−13,
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR−LOW SPEED G−15, L−17)
(P−10, L−13)
TR TRANSFORMER (M−3)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION)
(D−23) TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (D−3)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (J−11) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (E−7)
F FUSE (C−7, D−7, F−21, G−21) TS CONTROLLER RELAY − ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
VALVE (E−10)
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
TV CONTROLLER RELAY − LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (G−9) FANS (J−13)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (N−7, L−15) VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (N−17)
WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (J−12)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (E−12)

Figure 7−4 LEGEND − Unit With Autotransformer

7−5 T-362
 Based on Drawing 62−66088
Figure 7−5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, Unit With Autotransformer

T-362 7−6
 Based on Drawing 62−11737

Figure 7−6 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM, Unit With Autotransformer (Sheet 1 of 2)

7−7 T-362
 Based on Drawing 62−11737

Figure 7−6 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM, Unit With Autotransformer (Sheet 2 of 2)

T-362 7−8
 INDEX

A Control Box, 1−1

Control Box Description, 2−5
Adjusting Fresh Air Makeup, 4−1
Controller, 1−2, 3−3
Air−Cooled Condenser Description, 2−4
CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS, 3−29
Alarm Code, 3−29
Controller Alarms, 3−12
Alarm Indications, 3−29
Controller Alarm Codes, 3−29
Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence, 3−28
Controller Configuration Codes, 3−19
Aluminum oxide, 6−10
Controller Function Codes, 3−20
Automatic Defrost, 3−9
CONTROLLER PRE−TRIP TEST CODES, 3−37
Autotransformer, 1−2
Controller Service, 6−15
Autotransformer Service, 6−15
CONTROLLER SOFTWARE, 3−3

B D
Back Panels, 1−2
DataBANK Card, 3−17
Battery, 1−1
DataCORDER, 3−13, 4−5
Battery Replacement, 6−17
DataCORDER Alarm Codes, 3−45
DataCORDER Alarm Configuration, 3−16
C DataCORDER Alarms, 3−18
Cable Restraint, 1−2 DataCORDER Communications, 3−16
Cable, 230 Volt, 1−2 DataCORDER Configuration Software, 3−13
Cable, 460 Volt, 1−2 DataCORDER Function Codes, 3−43
Communications Interface Module, 1−2, 3−17 DataCORDER Logging Interval, 3−14
Communications Interface Module Description, 2−5 DataCORDER Operational Software, 3−13
Communications Interface Module Service, 6−26 DataCORDER Power Up, 3−16
Compressor, 1−1, 6−5 DataCORDER Pre−Trip Codes, 3−44
Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor, 6−22 DataCORDER Pre−Trip Data Recording, 3−16
Compressor Removal and Replacement , 6−5 DataCORDER Sampling Type, 3−16
Compressor Section Description, 2−3 DataCORDER Sensor Configuration, 3−14
Compressor−Cycle Perishable Cooling, 3−12 DataCORDER Software, 3−13
CONDENSER COIL, 1−1, 6−7 DataCORDER Standard Configurations, 3−16
Condenser Coil Cleaning, 6−7 DataCORDER Thermistor Format, 3−14
Condenser Coil Installation, 6−7 DataLINE, 3−17
Condenser Coil Preparation, 6−7 Defrost, 3−9
Condenser Coil Removal, 6−7 Defrost Initiation, 3−9
CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR, 6−8 Defrost Interval, 3−10
Condenser Fan Remove/Replace, 6−8 Defrost Related Settings, 3−10
Condenser Grille, 1−2 Dehumidification, 1−1, 3−5
Condenser Pressure Control, 3−11 Dehumidification − Bulb Mode, 3−6
Configuration Software (CnF Variables), 3−3 Digital Unloader Valve Service, 6−13
Connecting Power, 4−1 Display Alarm Codes, 3−12
Connecting the Remote Monitoring Receptacle, 4−4 Display Module, 3−2

Index−1 T-362
 INDEX (Continued)

E Fumigation, 6−10

eAutoFresh, 1−2
eAutoFresh Modes of Operation, 4−3
G
eAutoFresh Operation, 4−3 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES, Safety−1
eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection, 4−3 General Unit Description, 2−1
eAutoFresh Service, 6−23 Generator Protection, 3−11
eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure, 4−3 Gutters, 1−2
Economized Operation, Refrigeration Circuit, 2−9
Economizer Expansion Valve Service, 6−12 H
Economizer Solenoid Valve Service, 6−12
Handles, 1−2
EEV Replacement, 6−12
HAZARD STATEMENTS, Safety−1
Electrical Data, 2−7
Heat Lockout, 3−4, 3−7
Electronic Expansion Valve Description, 2−9
Heater Service, 6−9
Electronic Expansion Valve Service, 6−11
High Pressure Switch Service, 6−6
Emergency Bypass, 1−2
High Temperature, Low Pressure Protection, 3−11
Emergency Bypass Operation, 4−7
EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION, 6−3
Evaporator, 1−1 I
Evaporator Coil Service, 6−9 Inspection, 4−1
Evaporator Fan and Motor Service, 6−10 Interrogator, 1−1
Evaporator Fan Operation, 1−1, 3−11 Introduction, 1−1
Evaporator Section Cleaning, 6−10 ISO Trip Header, 3−18
Evaporator Section Description, 2−2
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning, 6−21 K
Keypad, 3−2
F
Failure Action, 3−11 L
Feature Descriptions, 1−1
Labels, 1−2
Filter Drier Service, 6−9
Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up), 1−2
FIRST AID, Safety−1
Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent, 4−2
Fresh Air Makeup Description, 2−1
Frozen “Heat” Mode, 3−8
Frozen Economy Mode, 3−8 M
Frozen Idle Mode, 3−7 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS, Safety−1
Frozen Mode − Temperature Control, 3−7 Manifold Gauge Set Service, 6−1
Frozen Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation, 3−8 Microprocessor System Description, 3−1
Frozen Steady State, 3−7 MODES OF OPERATION, 3−4

T-362
Index−2
 INDEX (Continued)

O S
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS, Safety−1 Safety and Protective Devices, 2−8
Operational Software (Cd Function Codes), 3−4 Sensor and Cable Splice, 6−20
Option Descriptions, 1−1 Sensor DTS Re-Installation, 6−21
Sensor Replacement, 6−20

P Sensor Types, 6−20

Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation, 6−22
Painted Surfaces Maintenance, 6−26
Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation, 6−21
Perishable Dehumidification, 3−5
Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation, 6−21
Perishable Economy, 3−6
Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation, 6−21
Perishable Heating, 3−4
SERVICE CONNECTIONS, 6−2
Perishable Idle, Air Circulation, 3−4
Software Programming Procedure, 6−16
Perishable Mode − Trim Heat, 3−7
Standard Operation, Refrigeration Circuit, 2−9
Perishable Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation ,
Start up − Compressor Bump Start, 3−4
3−6
Start up − Compressor Phase Sequence, 3−4
Perishable Mode Heating − Sequence of Operation ,
3−7 Start−Up Inspection, 4−5
Perishable Mode Temperature Control, 3−4 Starting Instructions, 4−5
Perishable Pulldown, 3−4 Stopping Instructions, 4−5
Perishable Steady State, 3−4 Surface corrosion, 6−10
Plate Set, 1−1 System Pressure Regulation, 3−11
Pre−Trip Diagnosis, 4−5
PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSTICS, 3−12
T
Pre−Trip Test Codes , 3−37
Temperature Readout, 1−1
Pressure Readout, 1−1
Temperature Recorder−Starting Instructions, 4−5
PROBE DIAGNOSTICS, 4−6
Temperature Sensor Service, 6−18
Programming Procedure for Software, 6−16
Thermometer Port, 1−2
Protective Modes of Operation, 3−11
Torque Values, 6−28
PUMP DOWN THE UNIT, 6−2
Troubleshooting, 5−1

Q
U
QUEST − CCPC, 1−2, 3−12
Unit Configuration Identification, 1−1
Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up), 1−2
R Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent, 4−2
REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING, 6−3 Upper VPS, 6−22
Refrigeration Circuit, 2−9 USDA, 1−1
Refrigeration System Data, 2−6 USDA Cold Treatment, 3−17
Refrigeration Unit Description − Front Section, 2−1 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure, 3−17
Remote Monitoring, 1−1 USDA Recording, 3−17
Return Sensor Positioning, 6−21 USDA/ Message Trip Comment, 3−17

Index−3 T-362
 INDEX (Continued)

V 0
Valve Override Controls, 6−14 07−00176−11, 6−3
Vent Position Sensor, 4−3 07−00277−00, 6−15
VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS), 6−22 07−00294−00, 6−1
07−00304−00, 6−15

W
Water Cooling, 1−2 7
Wiring Schematic, 7−1 76−00685−00, 6−26

T-362
Index−4
A member of the United Technologies Corporation family.
Stock symbol UTX

Carrier Transicold Division,

Carrier Corporation
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, N.Y. 13221 U.S A

www.carrier.transicold.com